1.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK 2 3****************** 4Variables Glossary 5****************** 6 7This chapter lists common variables used in the OpenEmbedded build 8system and gives an overview of their function and contents. 9 10:term:`A <ABIEXTENSION>` :term:`B` :term:`C <CACHE>` 11:term:`D` :term:`E <EFI_PROVIDER>` :term:`F <FEATURE_PACKAGES>` 12:term:`G <GCCPIE>` :term:`H <HOMEPAGE>` :term:`I <ICECC_DISABLED>` 13:term:`K <KARCH>` :term:`L <LABELS>` :term:`M <MACHINE>` 14:term:`N <NATIVELSBSTRING>` :term:`O <OBJCOPY>` :term:`P` 15:term:`R <RANLIB>` :term:`S` :term:`T` 16:term:`U <UBOOT_CONFIG>` :term:`V <VOLATILE_LOG_DIR>` 17:term:`W <WARN_QA>` :term:`X <XSERVER>` 18 19.. glossary:: 20 21 :term:`ABIEXTENSION` 22 Extension to the Application Binary Interface (ABI) field of the GNU 23 canonical architecture name (e.g. "eabi"). 24 25 ABI extensions are set in the machine include files. For example, the 26 ``meta/conf/machine/include/arm/arch-arm.inc`` file sets the 27 following extension: 28 :: 29 30 ABIEXTENSION = "eabi" 31 32 :term:`ALLOW_EMPTY` 33 Specifies whether to produce an output package even if it is empty. 34 By default, BitBake does not produce empty packages. This default 35 behavior can cause issues when there is an 36 :term:`RDEPENDS` or some other hard runtime 37 requirement on the existence of the package. 38 39 Like all package-controlling variables, you must always use them in 40 conjunction with a package name override, as in: 41 :: 42 43 ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN} = "1" 44 ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN}-dev = "1" 45 ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN}-staticdev = "1" 46 47 :term:`ALTERNATIVE` 48 Lists commands in a package that need an alternative binary naming 49 scheme. Sometimes the same command is provided in multiple packages. 50 When this occurs, the OpenEmbedded build system needs to use the 51 alternatives system to create a different binary naming scheme so the 52 commands can co-exist. 53 54 To use the variable, list out the package's commands that also exist 55 as part of another package. For example, if the ``busybox`` package 56 has four commands that also exist as part of another package, you 57 identify them as follows: 58 :: 59 60 ALTERNATIVE_busybox = "sh sed test bracket" 61 62 For more information on the alternatives system, see the 63 ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`" 64 section. 65 66 :term:`ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME` 67 Used by the alternatives system to map duplicated commands to actual 68 locations. For example, if the ``bracket`` command provided by the 69 ``busybox`` package is duplicated through another package, you must 70 use the ``ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME`` variable to specify the actual 71 location: 72 :: 73 74 ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME[bracket] = "/usr/bin/[" 75 76 In this example, the binary for the ``bracket`` command (i.e. ``[``) 77 from the ``busybox`` package resides in ``/usr/bin/``. 78 79 .. note:: 80 81 If ``ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME`` is not defined, it defaults to ``${bindir}/name``. 82 83 For more information on the alternatives system, see the 84 ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`" 85 section. 86 87 :term:`ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY` 88 Used by the alternatives system to create default priorities for 89 duplicated commands. You can use the variable to create a single 90 default regardless of the command name or package, a default for 91 specific duplicated commands regardless of the package, or a default 92 for specific commands tied to particular packages. Here are the 93 available syntax forms: 94 :: 95 96 ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY = "priority" 97 ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY[name] = "priority" 98 ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY_pkg[name] = "priority" 99 100 For more information on the alternatives system, see the 101 ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`" 102 section. 103 104 :term:`ALTERNATIVE_TARGET` 105 Used by the alternatives system to create default link locations for 106 duplicated commands. You can use the variable to create a single 107 default location for all duplicated commands regardless of the 108 command name or package, a default for specific duplicated commands 109 regardless of the package, or a default for specific commands tied to 110 particular packages. Here are the available syntax forms: 111 :: 112 113 ALTERNATIVE_TARGET = "target" 114 ALTERNATIVE_TARGET[name] = "target" 115 ALTERNATIVE_TARGET_pkg[name] = "target" 116 117 .. note:: 118 119 If ``ALTERNATIVE_TARGET`` is not defined, it inherits the value 120 from the :term:`ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME` variable. 121 122 If ``ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME`` and ``ALTERNATIVE_TARGET`` are the 123 same, the target for ``ALTERNATIVE_TARGET`` has "``.{BPN}``" 124 appended to it. 125 126 Finally, if the file referenced has not been renamed, the 127 alternatives system will rename it to avoid the need to rename 128 alternative files in the :ref:`ref-tasks-install` 129 task while retaining support for the command if necessary. 130 131 For more information on the alternatives system, see the 132 ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`" 133 section. 134 135 :term:`ANY_OF_DISTRO_FEATURES` 136 When inheriting the 137 :ref:`features_check <ref-classes-features_check>` 138 class, this variable identifies a list of distribution features where 139 at least one must be enabled in the current configuration in order 140 for the OpenEmbedded build system to build the recipe. In other words, 141 if none of the features listed in ``ANY_OF_DISTRO_FEATURES`` 142 appear in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` within the current configuration, then 143 the recipe will be skipped, and if the build system attempts to build 144 the recipe then an error will be triggered. 145 146 147 :term:`APPEND` 148 An override list of append strings for each target specified with 149 :term:`LABELS`. 150 151 See the :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more 152 information on how this variable is used. 153 154 :term:`AR` 155 The minimal command and arguments used to run ``ar``. 156 157 :term:`ARCHIVER_MODE` 158 When used with the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class, 159 determines the type of information used to create a released archive. 160 You can use this variable to create archives of patched source, 161 original source, configured source, and so forth by employing the 162 following variable flags (varflags): 163 :: 164 165 ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "original" # Uses original (unpacked) source files. 166 ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "patched" # Uses patched source files. This is the default. 167 ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "configured" # Uses configured source files. 168 ARCHIVER_MODE[diff] = "1" # Uses patches between do_unpack and do_patch. 169 ARCHIVER_MODE[diff-exclude] ?= "file file ..." # Lists files and directories to exclude from diff. 170 ARCHIVER_MODE[dumpdata] = "1" # Uses environment data. 171 ARCHIVER_MODE[recipe] = "1" # Uses recipe and include files. 172 ARCHIVER_MODE[srpm] = "1" # Uses RPM package files. 173 174 For information on how the variable works, see the 175 ``meta/classes/archiver.bbclass`` file in the :term:`Source Directory`. 176 177 :term:`AS` 178 Minimal command and arguments needed to run the assembler. 179 180 :term:`ASSUME_PROVIDED` 181 Lists recipe names (:term:`PN` values) BitBake does not 182 attempt to build. Instead, BitBake assumes these recipes have already 183 been built. 184 185 In OpenEmbedded-Core, ``ASSUME_PROVIDED`` mostly specifies native 186 tools that should not be built. An example is ``git-native``, which 187 when specified, allows for the Git binary from the host to be used 188 rather than building ``git-native``. 189 190 :term:`ASSUME_SHLIBS` 191 Provides additional ``shlibs`` provider mapping information, which 192 adds to or overwrites the information provided automatically by the 193 system. Separate multiple entries using spaces. 194 195 As an example, use the following form to add an ``shlib`` provider of 196 shlibname in packagename with the optional version: 197 :: 198 199 shlibname:packagename[_version] 200 201 Here is an example that adds a shared library named ``libEGL.so.1`` 202 as being provided by the ``libegl-implementation`` package: 203 :: 204 205 ASSUME_SHLIBS = "libEGL.so.1:libegl-implementation" 206 207 :term:`AUTHOR` 208 The email address used to contact the original author or authors in 209 order to send patches and forward bugs. 210 211 :term:`AUTO_LIBNAME_PKGS` 212 When the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class is inherited, 213 which is the default behavior, ``AUTO_LIBNAME_PKGS`` specifies which 214 packages should be checked for libraries and renamed according to 215 Debian library package naming. 216 217 The default value is "${PACKAGES}", which causes the debian class to 218 act on all packages that are explicitly generated by the recipe. 219 220 :term:`AUTO_SYSLINUXMENU` 221 Enables creating an automatic menu for the syslinux bootloader. You 222 must set this variable in your recipe. The 223 :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class checks this variable. 224 225 :term:`AUTOREV` 226 When ``SRCREV`` is set to the value of this variable, it specifies to 227 use the latest source revision in the repository. Here is an example: 228 :: 229 230 SRCREV = "${AUTOREV}" 231 232 If you use the previous statement to retrieve the latest version of 233 software, you need to be sure :term:`PV` contains 234 ``${``\ :term:`SRCPV`\ ``}``. For example, suppose you 235 have a kernel recipe that inherits the 236 :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class and you use the previous 237 statement. In this example, ``${SRCPV}`` does not automatically get 238 into ``PV``. Consequently, you need to change ``PV`` in your recipe 239 so that it does contain ``${SRCPV}``. 240 241 For more information see the 242 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:automatically incrementing a package version number`" 243 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 244 245 :term:`AVAILABLE_LICENSES` 246 List of licenses found in the directories specified by 247 :term:`COMMON_LICENSE_DIR` and 248 :term:`LICENSE_PATH`. 249 250 .. note:: 251 252 It is assumed that all changes to ``COMMON_LICENSE_DIR`` and 253 ``LICENSE_PATH`` have been done before ``AVAILABLE_LICENSES`` 254 is defined (in :ref:`ref-classes-license`). 255 256 :term:`AVAILTUNES` 257 The list of defined CPU and Application Binary Interface (ABI) 258 tunings (i.e. "tunes") available for use by the OpenEmbedded build 259 system. 260 261 The list simply presents the tunes that are available. Not all tunes 262 may be compatible with a particular machine configuration, or with 263 each other in a 264 :ref:`Multilib <dev-manual/common-tasks:combining multiple versions of library files into one image>` 265 configuration. 266 267 To add a tune to the list, be sure to append it with spaces using the 268 "+=" BitBake operator. Do not simply replace the list by using the 269 "=" operator. See the 270 ":ref:`Basic Syntax <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:basic syntax>`" section in the BitBake 271 User Manual for more information. 272 273 :term:`AZ_SAS` 274 Azure Storage Shared Access Signature, when using the 275 :ref:`Azure Storage fetcher (az://) <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-fetching:fetchers>` 276 This variable can be defined to be used by the fetcher to authenticate 277 and gain access to non-public artifacts. 278 :: 279 280 AZ_SAS = ""se=2021-01-01&sp=r&sv=2018-11-09&sr=c&skoid=<skoid>&sig=<signature>"" 281 282 For more information see Microsoft's Azure Storage documentation at 283 https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/storage/common/storage-sas-overview 284 285 :term:`B` 286 The directory within the :term:`Build Directory` in 287 which the OpenEmbedded build system places generated objects during a 288 recipe's build process. By default, this directory is the same as the 289 :term:`S` directory, which is defined as: 290 :: 291 292 S = "${WORKDIR}/${BP}" 293 294 You can separate the (``S``) directory and the directory pointed to 295 by the ``B`` variable. Most Autotools-based recipes support 296 separating these directories. The build system defaults to using 297 separate directories for ``gcc`` and some kernel recipes. 298 299 :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS` 300 Lists "recommended-only" packages to not install. Recommended-only 301 packages are packages installed only through the 302 :term:`RRECOMMENDS` variable. You can prevent any 303 of these "recommended" packages from being installed by listing them 304 with the ``BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS`` variable: 305 :: 306 307 BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS = "package_name package_name package_name ..." 308 309 You can set this variable globally in your ``local.conf`` file or you 310 can attach it to a specific image recipe by using the recipe name 311 override: 312 :: 313 314 BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS_pn-target_image = "package_name" 315 316 It is important to realize that if you choose to not install packages 317 using this variable and some other packages are dependent on them 318 (i.e. listed in a recipe's :term:`RDEPENDS` 319 variable), the OpenEmbedded build system ignores your request and 320 will install the packages to avoid dependency errors. 321 322 Support for this variable exists only when using the IPK and RPM 323 packaging backend. Support does not exist for DEB. 324 325 See the :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS` and the 326 :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE` variables for related 327 information. 328 329 :term:`BASE_LIB` 330 The library directory name for the CPU or Application Binary 331 Interface (ABI) tune. The ``BASE_LIB`` applies only in the Multilib 332 context. See the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:combining multiple versions of library files into one image`" 333 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for information 334 on Multilib. 335 336 The ``BASE_LIB`` variable is defined in the machine include files in 337 the :term:`Source Directory`. If Multilib is not 338 being used, the value defaults to "lib". 339 340 :term:`BASE_WORKDIR` 341 Points to the base of the work directory for all recipes. The default 342 value is "${TMPDIR}/work". 343 344 :term:`BB_ALLOWED_NETWORKS` 345 Specifies a space-delimited list of hosts that the fetcher is allowed 346 to use to obtain the required source code. Following are 347 considerations surrounding this variable: 348 349 - This host list is only used if ``BB_NO_NETWORK`` is either not set 350 or set to "0". 351 352 - Limited support for wildcard matching against the beginning of 353 host names exists. For example, the following setting matches 354 ``git.gnu.org``, ``ftp.gnu.org``, and ``foo.git.gnu.org``. 355 :: 356 357 BB_ALLOWED_NETWORKS = "*.gnu.org" 358 359 .. note:: 360 361 The use of the "``*``" character only works at the beginning of 362 a host name and it must be isolated from the remainder of the 363 host name. You cannot use the wildcard character in any other 364 location of the name or combined with the front part of the 365 name. 366 367 For example, ``*.foo.bar`` is supported, while ``*aa.foo.bar`` 368 is not. 369 370 - Mirrors not in the host list are skipped and logged in debug. 371 372 - Attempts to access networks not in the host list cause a failure. 373 374 Using ``BB_ALLOWED_NETWORKS`` in conjunction with 375 :term:`PREMIRRORS` is very useful. Adding the host 376 you want to use to ``PREMIRRORS`` results in the source code being 377 fetched from an allowed location and avoids raising an error when a 378 host that is not allowed is in a :term:`SRC_URI` 379 statement. This is because the fetcher does not attempt to use the 380 host listed in ``SRC_URI`` after a successful fetch from the 381 ``PREMIRRORS`` occurs. 382 383 :term:`BB_DANGLINGAPPENDS_WARNONLY` 384 Defines how BitBake handles situations where an append file 385 (``.bbappend``) has no corresponding recipe file (``.bb``). This 386 condition often occurs when layers get out of sync (e.g. ``oe-core`` 387 bumps a recipe version and the old recipe no longer exists and the 388 other layer has not been updated to the new version of the recipe 389 yet). 390 391 The default fatal behavior is safest because it is the sane reaction 392 given something is out of sync. It is important to realize when your 393 changes are no longer being applied. 394 395 You can change the default behavior by setting this variable to "1", 396 "yes", or "true" in your ``local.conf`` file, which is located in the 397 :term:`Build Directory`: Here is an example: 398 :: 399 400 BB_DANGLINGAPPENDS_WARNONLY = "1" 401 402 :term:`BB_DISKMON_DIRS` 403 Monitors disk space and available inodes during the build and allows 404 you to control the build based on these parameters. 405 406 Disk space monitoring is disabled by default. To enable monitoring, 407 add the ``BB_DISKMON_DIRS`` variable to your ``conf/local.conf`` file 408 found in the :term:`Build Directory`. Use the 409 following form: 410 411 .. code-block:: none 412 413 BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "action,dir,threshold [...]" 414 415 where: 416 417 action is: 418 ABORT: Immediately abort the build when 419 a threshold is broken. 420 STOPTASKS: Stop the build after the currently 421 executing tasks have finished when 422 a threshold is broken. 423 WARN: Issue a warning but continue the 424 build when a threshold is broken. 425 Subsequent warnings are issued as 426 defined by the BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL 427 variable, which must be defined in 428 the conf/local.conf file. 429 430 dir is: 431 Any directory you choose. You can specify one or 432 more directories to monitor by separating the 433 groupings with a space. If two directories are 434 on the same device, only the first directory 435 is monitored. 436 437 threshold is: 438 Either the minimum available disk space, 439 the minimum number of free inodes, or 440 both. You must specify at least one. To 441 omit one or the other, simply omit the value. 442 Specify the threshold using G, M, K for Gbytes, 443 Mbytes, and Kbytes, respectively. If you do 444 not specify G, M, or K, Kbytes is assumed by 445 default. Do not use GB, MB, or KB. 446 447 Here are some examples: 448 :: 449 450 BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "ABORT,${TMPDIR},1G,100K WARN,${SSTATE_DIR},1G,100K" 451 BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "STOPTASKS,${TMPDIR},1G" 452 BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "ABORT,${TMPDIR},,100K" 453 454 The first example works only if you also provide the 455 :term:`BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL` 456 variable in the ``conf/local.conf``. This example causes the build 457 system to immediately abort when either the disk space in 458 ``${TMPDIR}`` drops below 1 Gbyte or the available free inodes drops 459 below 100 Kbytes. Because two directories are provided with the 460 variable, the build system also issue a warning when the disk space 461 in the ``${SSTATE_DIR}`` directory drops below 1 Gbyte or the number 462 of free inodes drops below 100 Kbytes. Subsequent warnings are issued 463 during intervals as defined by the ``BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL`` 464 variable. 465 466 The second example stops the build after all currently executing 467 tasks complete when the minimum disk space in the ``${TMPDIR}`` 468 directory drops below 1 Gbyte. No disk monitoring occurs for the free 469 inodes in this case. 470 471 The final example immediately aborts the build when the number of 472 free inodes in the ``${TMPDIR}`` directory drops below 100 Kbytes. No 473 disk space monitoring for the directory itself occurs in this case. 474 475 :term:`BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL` 476 Defines the disk space and free inode warning intervals. To set these 477 intervals, define the variable in your ``conf/local.conf`` file in 478 the :term:`Build Directory`. 479 480 If you are going to use the ``BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL`` variable, you 481 must also use the :term:`BB_DISKMON_DIRS` 482 variable and define its action as "WARN". During the build, 483 subsequent warnings are issued each time disk space or number of free 484 inodes further reduces by the respective interval. 485 486 If you do not provide a ``BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL`` variable and you 487 do use ``BB_DISKMON_DIRS`` with the "WARN" action, the disk 488 monitoring interval defaults to the following: 489 :: 490 491 BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL = "50M,5K" 492 493 When specifying the variable in your configuration file, use the 494 following form: 495 496 .. code-block:: none 497 498 BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL = "disk_space_interval,disk_inode_interval" 499 500 where: 501 502 disk_space_interval is: 503 An interval of memory expressed in either 504 G, M, or K for Gbytes, Mbytes, or Kbytes, 505 respectively. You cannot use GB, MB, or KB. 506 507 disk_inode_interval is: 508 An interval of free inodes expressed in either 509 G, M, or K for Gbytes, Mbytes, or Kbytes, 510 respectively. You cannot use GB, MB, or KB. 511 512 Here is an example: 513 :: 514 515 BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "WARN,${SSTATE_DIR},1G,100K" 516 BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL = "50M,5K" 517 518 These variables cause the 519 OpenEmbedded build system to issue subsequent warnings each time the 520 available disk space further reduces by 50 Mbytes or the number of 521 free inodes further reduces by 5 Kbytes in the ``${SSTATE_DIR}`` 522 directory. Subsequent warnings based on the interval occur each time 523 a respective interval is reached beyond the initial warning (i.e. 1 524 Gbytes and 100 Kbytes). 525 526 :term:`BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS` 527 Causes tarballs of the source control repositories (e.g. Git 528 repositories), including metadata, to be placed in the 529 :term:`DL_DIR` directory. 530 531 For performance reasons, creating and placing tarballs of these 532 repositories is not the default action by the OpenEmbedded build 533 system. 534 :: 535 536 BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS = "1" 537 538 Set this variable in your 539 ``local.conf`` file in the :term:`Build Directory`. 540 541 Once you have the tarballs containing your source files, you can 542 clean up your ``DL_DIR`` directory by deleting any Git or other 543 source control work directories. 544 545 :term:`BB_NUMBER_THREADS` 546 The maximum number of tasks BitBake should run in parallel at any one 547 time. The OpenEmbedded build system automatically configures this 548 variable to be equal to the number of cores on the build system. For 549 example, a system with a dual core processor that also uses 550 hyper-threading causes the ``BB_NUMBER_THREADS`` variable to default 551 to "4". 552 553 For single socket systems (i.e. one CPU), you should not have to 554 override this variable to gain optimal parallelism during builds. 555 However, if you have very large systems that employ multiple physical 556 CPUs, you might want to make sure the ``BB_NUMBER_THREADS`` variable 557 is not set higher than "20". 558 559 For more information on speeding up builds, see the 560 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:speeding up a build`" 561 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 562 563 :term:`BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT` 564 Specifies the time (in seconds) after which to unload the BitBake 565 server due to inactivity. Set ``BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT`` to determine how 566 long the BitBake server stays resident between invocations. 567 568 For example, the following statement in your ``local.conf`` file 569 instructs the server to be unloaded after 20 seconds of inactivity: 570 :: 571 572 BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT = "20" 573 574 If you want the server to never be unloaded, 575 set ``BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT`` to "-1". 576 577 :term:`BBCLASSEXTEND` 578 Allows you to extend a recipe so that it builds variants of the 579 software. Common variants for recipes exist such as "natives" like 580 ``quilt-native``, which is a copy of Quilt built to run on the build 581 system; "crosses" such as ``gcc-cross``, which is a compiler built to 582 run on the build machine but produces binaries that run on the target 583 :term:`MACHINE`; "nativesdk", which targets the SDK 584 machine instead of ``MACHINE``; and "mulitlibs" in the form 585 "``multilib:``\ multilib_name". 586 587 To build a different variant of the recipe with a minimal amount of 588 code, it usually is as simple as adding the following to your recipe: 589 :: 590 591 BBCLASSEXTEND =+ "native nativesdk" 592 BBCLASSEXTEND =+ "multilib:multilib_name" 593 594 .. note:: 595 596 Internally, the ``BBCLASSEXTEND`` mechanism generates recipe 597 variants by rewriting variable values and applying overrides such 598 as ``_class-native``. For example, to generate a native version of 599 a recipe, a :term:`DEPENDS` on "foo" is rewritten 600 to a ``DEPENDS`` on "foo-native". 601 602 Even when using ``BBCLASSEXTEND``, the recipe is only parsed once. 603 Parsing once adds some limitations. For example, it is not 604 possible to include a different file depending on the variant, 605 since ``include`` statements are processed when the recipe is 606 parsed. 607 608 :term:`BBFILE_COLLECTIONS` 609 Lists the names of configured layers. These names are used to find 610 the other ``BBFILE_*`` variables. Typically, each layer will append 611 its name to this variable in its ``conf/layer.conf`` file. 612 613 :term:`BBFILE_PATTERN` 614 Variable that expands to match files from 615 :term:`BBFILES` in a particular layer. This variable 616 is used in the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be suffixed with the 617 name of the specific layer (e.g. ``BBFILE_PATTERN_emenlow``). 618 619 :term:`BBFILE_PRIORITY` 620 Assigns the priority for recipe files in each layer. 621 622 This variable is useful in situations where the same recipe appears 623 in more than one layer. Setting this variable allows you to 624 prioritize a layer against other layers that contain the same recipe 625 - effectively letting you control the precedence for the multiple 626 layers. The precedence established through this variable stands 627 regardless of a recipe's version (:term:`PV` variable). For 628 example, a layer that has a recipe with a higher ``PV`` value but for 629 which the ``BBFILE_PRIORITY`` is set to have a lower precedence still 630 has a lower precedence. 631 632 A larger value for the ``BBFILE_PRIORITY`` variable results in a 633 higher precedence. For example, the value 6 has a higher precedence 634 than the value 5. If not specified, the ``BBFILE_PRIORITY`` variable 635 is set based on layer dependencies (see the ``LAYERDEPENDS`` variable 636 for more information. The default priority, if unspecified for a 637 layer with no dependencies, is the lowest defined priority + 1 (or 1 638 if no priorities are defined). 639 640 .. tip:: 641 642 You can use the command ``bitbake-layers show-layers`` 643 to list all configured layers along with their priorities. 644 645 :term:`BBFILES` 646 A space-separated list of recipe files BitBake uses to build 647 software. 648 649 When specifying recipe files, you can pattern match using Python's 650 `glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`_ syntax. 651 For details on the syntax, see the documentation by following the 652 previous link. 653 654 :term:`BBFILES_DYNAMIC` 655 Activates content when identified layers are present. You identify 656 the layers by the collections that the layers define. 657 658 Use the ``BBFILES_DYNAMIC`` variable to avoid ``.bbappend`` files 659 whose corresponding ``.bb`` file is in a layer that attempts to 660 modify other layers through ``.bbappend`` but does not want to 661 introduce a hard dependency on those other layers. 662 663 Use the following form for ``BBFILES_DYNAMIC``: 664 collection_name:filename_pattern The following example identifies two 665 collection names and two filename patterns: 666 :: 667 668 BBFILES_DYNAMIC += " \ 669 clang-layer:${LAYERDIR}/bbappends/meta-clang/*/*/*.bbappend \ 670 core:${LAYERDIR}/bbappends/openembedded-core/meta/*/*/*.bbappend \ 671 " 672 673 This next example shows an error message that occurs because invalid 674 entries are found, which cause parsing to abort: 675 676 .. code-block:: none 677 678 ERROR: BBFILES_DYNAMIC entries must be of the form <collection name>:<filename pattern>, not: 679 /work/my-layer/bbappends/meta-security-isafw/*/*/*.bbappend 680 /work/my-layer/bbappends/openembedded-core/meta/*/*/*.bbappend 681 682 :term:`BBINCLUDELOGS` 683 Variable that controls how BitBake displays logs on build failure. 684 685 :term:`BBINCLUDELOGS_LINES` 686 If :term:`BBINCLUDELOGS` is set, specifies the 687 maximum number of lines from the task log file to print when 688 reporting a failed task. If you do not set ``BBINCLUDELOGS_LINES``, 689 the entire log is printed. 690 691 :term:`BBLAYERS` 692 Lists the layers to enable during the build. This variable is defined 693 in the ``bblayers.conf`` configuration file in the :term:`Build Directory`. 694 Here is an example: 695 :: 696 697 BBLAYERS = " \ 698 /home/scottrif/poky/meta \ 699 /home/scottrif/poky/meta-poky \ 700 /home/scottrif/poky/meta-yocto-bsp \ 701 /home/scottrif/poky/meta-mykernel \ 702 " 703 704 This example enables four layers, one of which is a custom, 705 user-defined layer named ``meta-mykernel``. 706 707 :term:`BBMASK` 708 Prevents BitBake from processing recipes and recipe append files. 709 710 You can use the ``BBMASK`` variable to "hide" these ``.bb`` and 711 ``.bbappend`` files. BitBake ignores any recipe or recipe append 712 files that match any of the expressions. It is as if BitBake does not 713 see them at all. Consequently, matching files are not parsed or 714 otherwise used by BitBake. 715 716 The values you provide are passed to Python's regular expression 717 compiler. Consequently, the syntax follows Python's Regular 718 Expression (re) syntax. The expressions are compared against the full 719 paths to the files. For complete syntax information, see Python's 720 documentation at https://docs.python.org/3/library/re.html#regular-expression-syntax. 721 722 The following example uses a complete regular expression to tell 723 BitBake to ignore all recipe and recipe append files in the 724 ``meta-ti/recipes-misc/`` directory: 725 :: 726 727 BBMASK = "meta-ti/recipes-misc/" 728 729 If you want to mask out multiple directories or recipes, you can 730 specify multiple regular expression fragments. This next example 731 masks out multiple directories and individual recipes: :: 732 733 BBMASK += "/meta-ti/recipes-misc/ meta-ti/recipes-ti/packagegroup/" 734 BBMASK += "/meta-oe/recipes-support/" 735 BBMASK += "/meta-foo/.*/openldap" 736 BBMASK += "opencv.*\.bbappend" 737 BBMASK += "lzma" 738 739 .. note:: 740 741 When specifying a directory name, use the trailing slash character 742 to ensure you match just that directory name. 743 744 :term:`BBMULTICONFIG` 745 Specifies each additional separate configuration when you are 746 building targets with multiple configurations. Use this variable in 747 your ``conf/local.conf`` configuration file. Specify a 748 multiconfigname for each configuration file you are using. For 749 example, the following line specifies three configuration files: 750 :: 751 752 BBMULTICONFIG = "configA configB configC" 753 754 Each configuration file you 755 use must reside in the :term:`Build Directory` 756 ``conf/multiconfig`` directory (e.g. 757 build_directory\ ``/conf/multiconfig/configA.conf``). 758 759 For information on how to use ``BBMULTICONFIG`` in an environment 760 that supports building targets with multiple configurations, see the 761 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building images for multiple targets using multiple configurations`" 762 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 763 764 :term:`BBPATH` 765 Used by BitBake to locate ``.bbclass`` and configuration files. This 766 variable is analogous to the ``PATH`` variable. 767 768 .. note:: 769 770 If you run BitBake from a directory outside of the 771 Build Directory 772 , you must be sure to set 773 BBPATH 774 to point to the Build Directory. Set the variable as you would any 775 environment variable and then run BitBake: 776 :: 777 778 $ BBPATH = "build_directory" 779 $ export BBPATH 780 $ bitbake target 781 782 783 :term:`BBSERVER` 784 If defined in the BitBake environment, ``BBSERVER`` points to the 785 BitBake remote server. 786 787 Use the following format to export the variable to the BitBake 788 environment: 789 :: 790 791 export BBSERVER=localhost:$port 792 793 By default, ``BBSERVER`` also appears in 794 :term:`bitbake:BB_HASHBASE_WHITELIST`. 795 Consequently, ``BBSERVER`` is excluded from checksum and dependency 796 data. 797 798 :term:`BINCONFIG` 799 When inheriting the 800 :ref:`binconfig-disabled <ref-classes-binconfig-disabled>` class, 801 this variable specifies binary configuration scripts to disable in 802 favor of using ``pkg-config`` to query the information. The 803 ``binconfig-disabled`` class will modify the specified scripts to 804 return an error so that calls to them can be easily found and 805 replaced. 806 807 To add multiple scripts, separate them by spaces. Here is an example 808 from the ``libpng`` recipe: 809 :: 810 811 BINCONFIG = "${bindir}/libpng-config ${bindir}/libpng16-config" 812 813 :term:`BINCONFIG_GLOB` 814 When inheriting the :ref:`binconfig <ref-classes-binconfig>` class, 815 this variable specifies a wildcard for configuration scripts that 816 need editing. The scripts are edited to correct any paths that have 817 been set up during compilation so that they are correct for use when 818 installed into the sysroot and called by the build processes of other 819 recipes. 820 821 .. note:: 822 823 The ``BINCONFIG_GLOB`` variable uses 824 `shell globbing <https://tldp.org/LDP/abs/html/globbingref.html>`__, 825 which is recognition and expansion of wildcards during pattern 826 matching. Shell globbing is very similar to 827 `fnmatch <https://docs.python.org/3/library/fnmatch.html#module-fnmatch>`__ 828 and `glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`__. 829 830 For more information on how this variable works, see 831 ``meta/classes/binconfig.bbclass`` in the :term:`Source Directory`. 832 You can also find general 833 information on the class in the 834 ":ref:`binconfig.bbclass <ref-classes-binconfig>`" section. 835 836 :term:`BP` 837 The base recipe name and version but without any special recipe name 838 suffix (i.e. ``-native``, ``lib64-``, and so forth). ``BP`` is 839 comprised of the following: 840 :: 841 842 ${BPN}-${PV} 843 844 :term:`BPN` 845 This variable is a version of the :term:`PN` variable with 846 common prefixes and suffixes removed, such as ``nativesdk-``, 847 ``-cross``, ``-native``, and multilib's ``lib64-`` and ``lib32-``. 848 The exact lists of prefixes and suffixes removed are specified by the 849 :term:`MLPREFIX` and 850 :term:`SPECIAL_PKGSUFFIX` variables, 851 respectively. 852 853 :term:`BUGTRACKER` 854 Specifies a URL for an upstream bug tracking website for a recipe. 855 The OpenEmbedded build system does not use this variable. Rather, the 856 variable is a useful pointer in case a bug in the software being 857 built needs to be manually reported. 858 859 :term:`BUILD_ARCH` 860 Specifies the architecture of the build host (e.g. ``i686``). The 861 OpenEmbedded build system sets the value of ``BUILD_ARCH`` from the 862 machine name reported by the ``uname`` command. 863 864 :term:`BUILD_AS_ARCH` 865 Specifies the architecture-specific assembler flags for the build 866 host. By default, the value of ``BUILD_AS_ARCH`` is empty. 867 868 :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH` 869 Specifies the architecture-specific C compiler flags for the build 870 host. By default, the value of ``BUILD_CC_ARCH`` is empty. 871 872 :term:`BUILD_CCLD` 873 Specifies the linker command to be used for the build host when the C 874 compiler is being used as the linker. By default, ``BUILD_CCLD`` 875 points to GCC and passes as arguments the value of 876 :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH`, assuming 877 ``BUILD_CC_ARCH`` is set. 878 879 :term:`BUILD_CFLAGS` 880 Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler when building for the 881 build host. When building in the ``-native`` context, 882 :term:`CFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable by 883 default. 884 885 :term:`BUILD_CPPFLAGS` 886 Specifies the flags to pass to the C preprocessor (i.e. to both the C 887 and the C++ compilers) when building for the build host. When 888 building in the ``-native`` context, :term:`CPPFLAGS` 889 is set to the value of this variable by default. 890 891 :term:`BUILD_CXXFLAGS` 892 Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler when building for the 893 build host. When building in the ``-native`` context, 894 :term:`CXXFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable 895 by default. 896 897 :term:`BUILD_FC` 898 Specifies the Fortran compiler command for the build host. By 899 default, ``BUILD_FC`` points to Gfortran and passes as arguments the 900 value of :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH`, assuming 901 ``BUILD_CC_ARCH`` is set. 902 903 :term:`BUILD_LD` 904 Specifies the linker command for the build host. By default, 905 ``BUILD_LD`` points to the GNU linker (ld) and passes as arguments 906 the value of :term:`BUILD_LD_ARCH`, assuming 907 ``BUILD_LD_ARCH`` is set. 908 909 :term:`BUILD_LD_ARCH` 910 Specifies architecture-specific linker flags for the build host. By 911 default, the value of ``BUILD_LD_ARCH`` is empty. 912 913 :term:`BUILD_LDFLAGS` 914 Specifies the flags to pass to the linker when building for the build 915 host. When building in the ``-native`` context, 916 :term:`LDFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable 917 by default. 918 919 :term:`BUILD_OPTIMIZATION` 920 Specifies the optimization flags passed to the C compiler when 921 building for the build host or the SDK. The flags are passed through 922 the :term:`BUILD_CFLAGS` and 923 :term:`BUILDSDK_CFLAGS` default values. 924 925 The default value of the ``BUILD_OPTIMIZATION`` variable is "-O2 926 -pipe". 927 928 :term:`BUILD_OS` 929 Specifies the operating system in use on the build host (e.g. 930 "linux"). The OpenEmbedded build system sets the value of 931 ``BUILD_OS`` from the OS reported by the ``uname`` command - the 932 first word, converted to lower-case characters. 933 934 :term:`BUILD_PREFIX` 935 The toolchain binary prefix used for native recipes. The OpenEmbedded 936 build system uses the ``BUILD_PREFIX`` value to set the 937 :term:`TARGET_PREFIX` when building for 938 ``native`` recipes. 939 940 :term:`BUILD_STRIP` 941 Specifies the command to be used to strip debugging symbols from 942 binaries produced for the build host. By default, ``BUILD_STRIP`` 943 points to 944 ``${``\ :term:`BUILD_PREFIX`\ ``}strip``. 945 946 :term:`BUILD_SYS` 947 Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating 948 system, to use when building for the build host (i.e. when building 949 ``native`` recipes). 950 951 The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based 952 on :term:`BUILD_ARCH`, 953 :term:`BUILD_VENDOR`, and 954 :term:`BUILD_OS`. You do not need to set the 955 ``BUILD_SYS`` variable yourself. 956 957 :term:`BUILD_VENDOR` 958 Specifies the vendor name to use when building for the build host. 959 The default value is an empty string (""). 960 961 :term:`BUILDDIR` 962 Points to the location of the :term:`Build Directory`. 963 You can define this directory indirectly through the 964 :ref:`structure-core-script` script by passing in a Build 965 Directory path when you run the script. If you run the script and do 966 not provide a Build Directory path, the ``BUILDDIR`` defaults to 967 ``build`` in the current directory. 968 969 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT` 970 When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` 971 class, this variable specifies whether or not to commit the build 972 history output in a local Git repository. If set to "1", this local 973 repository will be maintained automatically by the ``buildhistory`` 974 class and a commit will be created on every build for changes to each 975 top-level subdirectory of the build history output (images, packages, 976 and sdk). If you want to track changes to build history over time, 977 you should set this value to "1". 978 979 By default, the ``buildhistory`` class does not commit the build 980 history output in a local Git repository: 981 :: 982 983 BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT ?= "0" 984 985 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR` 986 When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` 987 class, this variable specifies the author to use for each Git commit. 988 In order for the ``BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR`` variable to work, the 989 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT` variable must 990 be set to "1". 991 992 Git requires that the value you provide for the 993 ``BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR`` variable takes the form of "name 994 email@host". Providing an email address or host that is not valid 995 does not produce an error. 996 997 By default, the ``buildhistory`` class sets the variable as follows: 998 :: 999 1000 BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR ?= "buildhistory <buildhistory@${DISTRO}>" 1001 1002 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_DIR` 1003 When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` 1004 class, this variable specifies the directory in which build history 1005 information is kept. For more information on how the variable works, 1006 see the ``buildhistory.class``. 1007 1008 By default, the ``buildhistory`` class sets the directory as follows: 1009 :: 1010 1011 BUILDHISTORY_DIR ?= "${TOPDIR}/buildhistory" 1012 1013 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_FEATURES` 1014 When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` 1015 class, this variable specifies the build history features to be 1016 enabled. For more information on how build history works, see the 1017 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:maintaining build output quality`" 1018 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 1019 1020 You can specify these features in the form of a space-separated list: 1021 1022 - *image:* Analysis of the contents of images, which includes the 1023 list of installed packages among other things. 1024 1025 - *package:* Analysis of the contents of individual packages. 1026 1027 - *sdk:* Analysis of the contents of the software development kit 1028 (SDK). 1029 1030 - *task:* Save output file signatures for 1031 :ref:`shared state <overview-manual/concepts:shared state cache>` 1032 (sstate) tasks. 1033 This saves one file per task and lists the SHA-256 checksums for 1034 each file staged (i.e. the output of the task). 1035 1036 By default, the ``buildhistory`` class enables the following 1037 features: 1038 :: 1039 1040 BUILDHISTORY_FEATURES ?= "image package sdk" 1041 1042 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_IMAGE_FILES` 1043 When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` 1044 class, this variable specifies a list of paths to files copied from 1045 the image contents into the build history directory under an 1046 "image-files" directory in the directory for the image, so that you 1047 can track the contents of each file. The default is to copy 1048 ``/etc/passwd`` and ``/etc/group``, which allows you to monitor for 1049 changes in user and group entries. You can modify the list to include 1050 any file. Specifying an invalid path does not produce an error. 1051 Consequently, you can include files that might not always be present. 1052 1053 By default, the ``buildhistory`` class provides paths to the 1054 following files: 1055 :: 1056 1057 BUILDHISTORY_IMAGE_FILES ?= "/etc/passwd /etc/group" 1058 1059 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_PUSH_REPO` 1060 When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` 1061 class, this variable optionally specifies a remote repository to 1062 which build history pushes Git changes. In order for 1063 ``BUILDHISTORY_PUSH_REPO`` to work, 1064 :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT` must be set to 1065 "1". 1066 1067 The repository should correspond to a remote address that specifies a 1068 repository as understood by Git, or alternatively to a remote name 1069 that you have set up manually using ``git remote`` within the local 1070 repository. 1071 1072 By default, the ``buildhistory`` class sets the variable as follows: 1073 :: 1074 1075 BUILDHISTORY_PUSH_REPO ?= "" 1076 1077 :term:`BUILDSDK_CFLAGS` 1078 Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler when building for the 1079 SDK. When building in the ``nativesdk-`` context, 1080 :term:`CFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable by 1081 default. 1082 1083 :term:`BUILDSDK_CPPFLAGS` 1084 Specifies the flags to pass to the C pre-processor (i.e. to both the 1085 C and the C++ compilers) when building for the SDK. When building in 1086 the ``nativesdk-`` context, :term:`CPPFLAGS` is set 1087 to the value of this variable by default. 1088 1089 :term:`BUILDSDK_CXXFLAGS` 1090 Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler when building for the 1091 SDK. When building in the ``nativesdk-`` context, 1092 :term:`CXXFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable 1093 by default. 1094 1095 :term:`BUILDSDK_LDFLAGS` 1096 Specifies the flags to pass to the linker when building for the SDK. 1097 When building in the ``nativesdk-`` context, 1098 :term:`LDFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable 1099 by default. 1100 1101 :term:`BUILDSTATS_BASE` 1102 Points to the location of the directory that holds build statistics 1103 when you use and enable the 1104 :ref:`buildstats <ref-classes-buildstats>` class. The 1105 ``BUILDSTATS_BASE`` directory defaults to 1106 ``${``\ :term:`TMPDIR`\ ``}/buildstats/``. 1107 1108 :term:`BUSYBOX_SPLIT_SUID` 1109 For the BusyBox recipe, specifies whether to split the output 1110 executable file into two parts: one for features that require 1111 ``setuid root``, and one for the remaining features (i.e. those that 1112 do not require ``setuid root``). 1113 1114 The ``BUSYBOX_SPLIT_SUID`` variable defaults to "1", which results in 1115 splitting the output executable file. Set the variable to "0" to get 1116 a single output executable file. 1117 1118 :term:`CACHE` 1119 Specifies the directory BitBake uses to store a cache of the 1120 :term:`Metadata` so it does not need to be parsed every time 1121 BitBake is started. 1122 1123 :term:`CC` 1124 The minimal command and arguments used to run the C compiler. 1125 1126 :term:`CFLAGS` 1127 Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler. This variable is 1128 exported to an environment variable and thus made visible to the 1129 software being built during the compilation step. 1130 1131 Default initialization for ``CFLAGS`` varies depending on what is 1132 being built: 1133 1134 - :term:`TARGET_CFLAGS` when building for the 1135 target 1136 1137 - :term:`BUILD_CFLAGS` when building for the 1138 build host (i.e. ``-native``) 1139 1140 - :term:`BUILDSDK_CFLAGS` when building for 1141 an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``) 1142 1143 :term:`CLASSOVERRIDE` 1144 An internal variable specifying the special class override that 1145 should currently apply (e.g. "class-target", "class-native", and so 1146 forth). The classes that use this variable (e.g. 1147 :ref:`native <ref-classes-native>`, 1148 :ref:`nativesdk <ref-classes-nativesdk>`, and so forth) set the 1149 variable to appropriate values. 1150 1151 .. note:: 1152 1153 ``CLASSOVERRIDE`` gets its default "class-target" value from the 1154 ``bitbake.conf`` file. 1155 1156 As an example, the following override allows you to install extra 1157 files, but only when building for the target: 1158 :: 1159 1160 do_install_append_class-target() { 1161 install my-extra-file ${D}${sysconfdir} 1162 } 1163 1164 Here is an example where ``FOO`` is set to 1165 "native" when building for the build host, and to "other" when not 1166 building for the build host: 1167 :: 1168 1169 FOO_class-native = "native" 1170 FOO = "other" 1171 1172 The underlying mechanism behind ``CLASSOVERRIDE`` is simply 1173 that it is included in the default value of 1174 :term:`OVERRIDES`. 1175 1176 :term:`CLEANBROKEN` 1177 If set to "1" within a recipe, ``CLEANBROKEN`` specifies that the 1178 ``make clean`` command does not work for the software being built. 1179 Consequently, the OpenEmbedded build system will not try to run 1180 ``make clean`` during the :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` 1181 task, which is the default behavior. 1182 1183 :term:`COMBINED_FEATURES` 1184 Provides a list of hardware features that are enabled in both 1185 :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES` and 1186 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`. This select list of 1187 features contains features that make sense to be controlled both at 1188 the machine and distribution configuration level. For example, the 1189 "bluetooth" feature requires hardware support but should also be 1190 optional at the distribution level, in case the hardware supports 1191 Bluetooth but you do not ever intend to use it. 1192 1193 :term:`COMMON_LICENSE_DIR` 1194 Points to ``meta/files/common-licenses`` in the 1195 :term:`Source Directory`, which is where generic license 1196 files reside. 1197 1198 :term:`COMPATIBLE_HOST` 1199 A regular expression that resolves to one or more hosts (when the 1200 recipe is native) or one or more targets (when the recipe is 1201 non-native) with which a recipe is compatible. The regular expression 1202 is matched against :term:`HOST_SYS`. You can use the 1203 variable to stop recipes from being built for classes of systems with 1204 which the recipes are not compatible. Stopping these builds is 1205 particularly useful with kernels. The variable also helps to increase 1206 parsing speed since the build system skips parsing recipes not 1207 compatible with the current system. 1208 1209 :term:`COMPATIBLE_MACHINE` 1210 A regular expression that resolves to one or more target machines 1211 with which a recipe is compatible. The regular expression is matched 1212 against :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES`. You can use 1213 the variable to stop recipes from being built for machines with which 1214 the recipes are not compatible. Stopping these builds is particularly 1215 useful with kernels. The variable also helps to increase parsing 1216 speed since the build system skips parsing recipes not compatible 1217 with the current machine. 1218 1219 :term:`COMPLEMENTARY_GLOB` 1220 Defines wildcards to match when installing a list of complementary 1221 packages for all the packages explicitly (or implicitly) installed in 1222 an image. 1223 1224 .. note:: 1225 1226 The ``COMPLEMENTARY_GLOB`` variable uses Unix filename pattern matching 1227 (`fnmatch <https://docs.python.org/3/library/fnmatch.html#module-fnmatch>`__), 1228 which is similar to the Unix style pathname pattern expansion 1229 (`glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`__). 1230 1231 The resulting list of complementary packages is associated with an 1232 item that can be added to 1233 :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`. An example usage of 1234 this is the "dev-pkgs" item that when added to ``IMAGE_FEATURES`` 1235 will install -dev packages (containing headers and other development 1236 files) for every package in the image. 1237 1238 To add a new feature item pointing to a wildcard, use a variable flag 1239 to specify the feature item name and use the value to specify the 1240 wildcard. Here is an example: 1241 :: 1242 1243 COMPLEMENTARY_GLOB[dev-pkgs] = '*-dev' 1244 1245 :term:`COMPONENTS_DIR` 1246 Stores sysroot components for each recipe. The OpenEmbedded build 1247 system uses ``COMPONENTS_DIR`` when constructing recipe-specific 1248 sysroots for other recipes. 1249 1250 The default is 1251 "``${``\ :term:`STAGING_DIR`\ ``}-components``." 1252 (i.e. 1253 "``${``\ :term:`TMPDIR`\ ``}/sysroots-components``"). 1254 1255 :term:`CONF_VERSION` 1256 Tracks the version of the local configuration file (i.e. 1257 ``local.conf``). The value for ``CONF_VERSION`` increments each time 1258 ``build/conf/`` compatibility changes. 1259 1260 :term:`CONFFILES` 1261 Identifies editable or configurable files that are part of a package. 1262 If the Package Management System (PMS) is being used to update 1263 packages on the target system, it is possible that configuration 1264 files you have changed after the original installation and that you 1265 now want to remain unchanged are overwritten. In other words, 1266 editable files might exist in the package that you do not want reset 1267 as part of the package update process. You can use the ``CONFFILES`` 1268 variable to list the files in the package that you wish to prevent 1269 the PMS from overwriting during this update process. 1270 1271 To use the ``CONFFILES`` variable, provide a package name override 1272 that identifies the resulting package. Then, provide a 1273 space-separated list of files. Here is an example: 1274 :: 1275 1276 CONFFILES_${PN} += "${sysconfdir}/file1 \ 1277 ${sysconfdir}/file2 ${sysconfdir}/file3" 1278 1279 A relationship exists between the ``CONFFILES`` and ``FILES`` 1280 variables. The files listed within ``CONFFILES`` must be a subset of 1281 the files listed within ``FILES``. Because the configuration files 1282 you provide with ``CONFFILES`` are simply being identified so that 1283 the PMS will not overwrite them, it makes sense that the files must 1284 already be included as part of the package through the ``FILES`` 1285 variable. 1286 1287 .. note:: 1288 1289 When specifying paths as part of the ``CONFFILES`` variable, it is 1290 good practice to use appropriate path variables. 1291 For example, ``${sysconfdir}`` rather than ``/etc`` or ``${bindir}`` 1292 rather than ``/usr/bin``. You can find a list of these variables at 1293 the top of the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file in the 1294 :term:`Source Directory`. 1295 1296 :term:`CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE` 1297 Identifies the initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) source files. The 1298 OpenEmbedded build system receives and uses this kernel Kconfig 1299 variable as an environment variable. By default, the variable is set 1300 to null (""). 1301 1302 The ``CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE`` can be either a single cpio archive 1303 with a ``.cpio`` suffix or a space-separated list of directories and 1304 files for building the initramfs image. A cpio archive should contain 1305 a filesystem archive to be used as an initramfs image. Directories 1306 should contain a filesystem layout to be included in the initramfs 1307 image. Files should contain entries according to the format described 1308 by the ``usr/gen_init_cpio`` program in the kernel tree. 1309 1310 If you specify multiple directories and files, the initramfs image 1311 will be the aggregate of all of them. 1312 1313 For information on creating an initramfs, see the 1314 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section 1315 in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 1316 1317 :term:`CONFIG_SITE` 1318 A list of files that contains ``autoconf`` test results relevant to 1319 the current build. This variable is used by the Autotools utilities 1320 when running ``configure``. 1321 1322 :term:`CONFIGURE_FLAGS` 1323 The minimal arguments for GNU configure. 1324 1325 :term:`CONFLICT_DISTRO_FEATURES` 1326 When inheriting the 1327 :ref:`features_check <ref-classes-features_check>` 1328 class, this variable identifies distribution features that would be 1329 in conflict should the recipe be built. In other words, if the 1330 ``CONFLICT_DISTRO_FEATURES`` variable lists a feature that also 1331 appears in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` within the current configuration, then 1332 the recipe will be skipped, and if the build system attempts to build 1333 the recipe then an error will be triggered. 1334 1335 :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE` 1336 A space-separated list of licenses to exclude from the source 1337 archived by the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. In 1338 other words, if a license in a recipe's 1339 :term:`LICENSE` value is in the value of 1340 ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE``, then its source is not archived by the 1341 class. 1342 1343 .. note:: 1344 1345 The ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE`` variable takes precedence over the 1346 :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE` variable. 1347 1348 The default value, which is "CLOSED Proprietary", for 1349 ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE`` is set by the 1350 :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which 1351 is inherited by the ``archiver`` class. 1352 1353 :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE` 1354 A space-separated list of licenses to include in the source archived 1355 by the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. In other 1356 words, if a license in a recipe's :term:`LICENSE` 1357 value is in the value of ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE``, then its 1358 source is archived by the class. 1359 1360 The default value is set by the 1361 :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which 1362 is inherited by the ``archiver`` class. The default value includes 1363 "GPL*", "LGPL*", and "AGPL*". 1364 1365 :term:`COPYLEFT_PN_EXCLUDE` 1366 A list of recipes to exclude in the source archived by the 1367 :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. The 1368 ``COPYLEFT_PN_EXCLUDE`` variable overrides the license inclusion and 1369 exclusion caused through the 1370 :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE` and 1371 :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE` 1372 variables, respectively. 1373 1374 The default value, which is "" indicating to not explicitly exclude 1375 any recipes by name, for ``COPYLEFT_PN_EXCLUDE`` is set by the 1376 :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which 1377 is inherited by the ``archiver`` class. 1378 1379 :term:`COPYLEFT_PN_INCLUDE` 1380 A list of recipes to include in the source archived by the 1381 :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. The 1382 ``COPYLEFT_PN_INCLUDE`` variable overrides the license inclusion and 1383 exclusion caused through the 1384 :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE` and 1385 :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE` 1386 variables, respectively. 1387 1388 The default value, which is "" indicating to not explicitly include 1389 any recipes by name, for ``COPYLEFT_PN_INCLUDE`` is set by the 1390 :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which 1391 is inherited by the ``archiver`` class. 1392 1393 :term:`COPYLEFT_RECIPE_TYPES` 1394 A space-separated list of recipe types to include in the source 1395 archived by the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. 1396 Recipe types are ``target``, ``native``, ``nativesdk``, ``cross``, 1397 ``crosssdk``, and ``cross-canadian``. 1398 1399 The default value, which is "target*", for ``COPYLEFT_RECIPE_TYPES`` 1400 is set by the :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` 1401 class, which is inherited by the ``archiver`` class. 1402 1403 :term:`COPY_LIC_DIRS` 1404 If set to "1" along with the 1405 :term:`COPY_LIC_MANIFEST` variable, the 1406 OpenEmbedded build system copies into the image the license files, 1407 which are located in ``/usr/share/common-licenses``, for each 1408 package. The license files are placed in directories within the image 1409 itself during build time. 1410 1411 .. note:: 1412 1413 The ``COPY_LIC_DIRS`` does not offer a path for adding licenses for 1414 newly installed packages to an image, which might be most suitable for 1415 read-only filesystems that cannot be upgraded. See the 1416 :term:`LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE` variable for additional information. 1417 You can also reference the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:providing license text`" 1418 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for 1419 information on providing license text. 1420 1421 :term:`COPY_LIC_MANIFEST` 1422 If set to "1", the OpenEmbedded build system copies the license 1423 manifest for the image to 1424 ``/usr/share/common-licenses/license.manifest`` within the image 1425 itself during build time. 1426 1427 .. note:: 1428 1429 The ``COPY_LIC_MANIFEST`` does not offer a path for adding licenses for 1430 newly installed packages to an image, which might be most suitable for 1431 read-only filesystems that cannot be upgraded. See the 1432 :term:`LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE` variable for additional information. 1433 You can also reference the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:providing license text`" 1434 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for 1435 information on providing license text. 1436 1437 :term:`CORE_IMAGE_EXTRA_INSTALL` 1438 Specifies the list of packages to be added to the image. You should 1439 only set this variable in the ``local.conf`` configuration file found 1440 in the :term:`Build Directory`. 1441 1442 This variable replaces ``POKY_EXTRA_INSTALL``, which is no longer 1443 supported. 1444 1445 :term:`COREBASE` 1446 Specifies the parent directory of the OpenEmbedded-Core Metadata 1447 layer (i.e. ``meta``). 1448 1449 It is an important distinction that ``COREBASE`` points to the parent 1450 of this layer and not the layer itself. Consider an example where you 1451 have cloned the Poky Git repository and retained the ``poky`` name 1452 for your local copy of the repository. In this case, ``COREBASE`` 1453 points to the ``poky`` folder because it is the parent directory of 1454 the ``poky/meta`` layer. 1455 1456 :term:`COREBASE_FILES` 1457 Lists files from the :term:`COREBASE` directory that 1458 should be copied other than the layers listed in the 1459 ``bblayers.conf`` file. The ``COREBASE_FILES`` variable exists for 1460 the purpose of copying metadata from the OpenEmbedded build system 1461 into the extensible SDK. 1462 1463 Explicitly listing files in ``COREBASE`` is needed because it 1464 typically contains build directories and other files that should not 1465 normally be copied into the extensible SDK. Consequently, the value 1466 of ``COREBASE_FILES`` is used in order to only copy the files that 1467 are actually needed. 1468 1469 :term:`CPP` 1470 The minimal command and arguments used to run the C preprocessor. 1471 1472 :term:`CPPFLAGS` 1473 Specifies the flags to pass to the C pre-processor (i.e. to both the 1474 C and the C++ compilers). This variable is exported to an environment 1475 variable and thus made visible to the software being built during the 1476 compilation step. 1477 1478 Default initialization for ``CPPFLAGS`` varies depending on what is 1479 being built: 1480 1481 - :term:`TARGET_CPPFLAGS` when building for 1482 the target 1483 1484 - :term:`BUILD_CPPFLAGS` when building for the 1485 build host (i.e. ``-native``) 1486 1487 - :term:`BUILDSDK_CPPFLAGS` when building 1488 for an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``) 1489 1490 :term:`CROSS_COMPILE` 1491 The toolchain binary prefix for the target tools. The 1492 ``CROSS_COMPILE`` variable is the same as the 1493 :term:`TARGET_PREFIX` variable. 1494 1495 .. note:: 1496 1497 The OpenEmbedded build system sets the ``CROSS_COMPILE`` 1498 variable only in certain contexts (e.g. when building for kernel 1499 and kernel module recipes). 1500 1501 :term:`CVSDIR` 1502 The directory in which files checked out under the CVS system are 1503 stored. 1504 1505 :term:`CXX` 1506 The minimal command and arguments used to run the C++ compiler. 1507 1508 :term:`CXXFLAGS` 1509 Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler. This variable is 1510 exported to an environment variable and thus made visible to the 1511 software being built during the compilation step. 1512 1513 Default initialization for ``CXXFLAGS`` varies depending on what is 1514 being built: 1515 1516 - :term:`TARGET_CXXFLAGS` when building for 1517 the target 1518 1519 - :term:`BUILD_CXXFLAGS` when building for the 1520 build host (i.e. ``-native``) 1521 1522 - :term:`BUILDSDK_CXXFLAGS` when building 1523 for an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``) 1524 1525 :term:`D` 1526 The destination directory. The location in the :term:`Build Directory` 1527 where components are installed by the 1528 :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task. This location defaults 1529 to: 1530 :: 1531 1532 ${WORKDIR}/image 1533 1534 .. note:: 1535 1536 Tasks that read from or write to this directory should run under 1537 :ref:`fakeroot <overview-manual/concepts:fakeroot and pseudo>`. 1538 1539 :term:`DATE` 1540 The date the build was started. Dates appear using the year, month, 1541 and day (YMD) format (e.g. "20150209" for February 9th, 2015). 1542 1543 :term:`DATETIME` 1544 The date and time on which the current build started. The format is 1545 suitable for timestamps. 1546 1547 :term:`DEBIAN_NOAUTONAME` 1548 When the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class is inherited, 1549 which is the default behavior, ``DEBIAN_NOAUTONAME`` specifies a 1550 particular package should not be renamed according to Debian library 1551 package naming. You must use the package name as an override when you 1552 set this variable. Here is an example from the ``fontconfig`` recipe: 1553 :: 1554 1555 DEBIAN_NOAUTONAME_fontconfig-utils = "1" 1556 1557 :term:`DEBIANNAME` 1558 When the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class is inherited, 1559 which is the default behavior, ``DEBIANNAME`` allows you to override 1560 the library name for an individual package. Overriding the library 1561 name in these cases is rare. You must use the package name as an 1562 override when you set this variable. Here is an example from the 1563 ``dbus`` recipe: 1564 :: 1565 1566 DEBIANNAME_${PN} = "dbus-1" 1567 1568 :term:`DEBUGINFOD_URLS` 1569 Points to the URL of the "debuginfod" server. Such that for every 1570 debugging information lookup, the debuginfod client will query the 1571 server and return the requested information. You set this variable 1572 in your ``local.conf`` file. 1573 1574 :term:`DEBUG_BUILD` 1575 Specifies to build packages with debugging information. This 1576 influences the value of the ``SELECTED_OPTIMIZATION`` variable. 1577 1578 :term:`DEBUG_OPTIMIZATION` 1579 The options to pass in ``TARGET_CFLAGS`` and ``CFLAGS`` when 1580 compiling a system for debugging. This variable defaults to "-O 1581 -fno-omit-frame-pointer ${DEBUG_FLAGS} -pipe". 1582 1583 :term:`DEFAULT_PREFERENCE` 1584 Specifies a weak bias for recipe selection priority. 1585 1586 The most common usage of this is variable is to set it to "-1" within 1587 a recipe for a development version of a piece of software. Using the 1588 variable in this way causes the stable version of the recipe to build 1589 by default in the absence of ``PREFERRED_VERSION`` being used to 1590 build the development version. 1591 1592 .. note:: 1593 1594 The bias provided by ``DEFAULT_PREFERENCE`` is weak and is overridden 1595 by :term:`BBFILE_PRIORITY` if that variable is different between two 1596 layers that contain different versions of the same recipe. 1597 1598 :term:`DEFAULTTUNE` 1599 The default CPU and Application Binary Interface (ABI) tunings (i.e. 1600 the "tune") used by the OpenEmbedded build system. The 1601 ``DEFAULTTUNE`` helps define 1602 :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`. 1603 1604 The default tune is either implicitly or explicitly set by the 1605 machine (:term:`MACHINE`). However, you can override 1606 the setting using available tunes as defined with 1607 :term:`AVAILTUNES`. 1608 1609 :term:`DEPENDS` 1610 Lists a recipe's build-time dependencies. These are dependencies on 1611 other recipes whose contents (e.g. headers and shared libraries) are 1612 needed by the recipe at build time. 1613 1614 As an example, consider a recipe ``foo`` that contains the following 1615 assignment: 1616 :: 1617 1618 DEPENDS = "bar" 1619 1620 The practical effect of the previous 1621 assignment is that all files installed by bar will be available in 1622 the appropriate staging sysroot, given by the 1623 :term:`STAGING_DIR* <STAGING_DIR>` variables, by the time the 1624 :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task for ``foo`` runs. 1625 This mechanism is implemented by having ``do_configure`` depend on 1626 the :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task of 1627 each recipe listed in ``DEPENDS``, through a 1628 ``[``\ :ref:`deptask <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:variable flags>`\ ``]`` 1629 declaration in the :ref:`base <ref-classes-base>` class. 1630 1631 .. note:: 1632 1633 It seldom is necessary to reference, for example, ``STAGING_DIR_HOST`` 1634 explicitly. The standard classes and build-related variables are 1635 configured to automatically use the appropriate staging sysroots. 1636 1637 As another example, ``DEPENDS`` can also be used to add utilities 1638 that run on the build machine during the build. For example, a recipe 1639 that makes use of a code generator built by the recipe ``codegen`` 1640 might have the following: 1641 :: 1642 1643 DEPENDS = "codegen-native" 1644 1645 For more 1646 information, see the :ref:`native <ref-classes-native>` class and 1647 the :term:`EXTRANATIVEPATH` variable. 1648 1649 .. note:: 1650 1651 - ``DEPENDS`` is a list of recipe names. Or, to be more precise, 1652 it is a list of :term:`PROVIDES` names, which 1653 usually match recipe names. Putting a package name such as 1654 "foo-dev" in ``DEPENDS`` does not make sense. Use "foo" 1655 instead, as this will put files from all the packages that make 1656 up ``foo``, which includes those from ``foo-dev``, into the 1657 sysroot. 1658 1659 - One recipe having another recipe in ``DEPENDS`` does not by 1660 itself add any runtime dependencies between the packages 1661 produced by the two recipes. However, as explained in the 1662 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`" 1663 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual, 1664 runtime dependencies will often be added automatically, meaning 1665 ``DEPENDS`` alone is sufficient for most recipes. 1666 1667 - Counterintuitively, ``DEPENDS`` is often necessary even for 1668 recipes that install precompiled components. For example, if 1669 ``libfoo`` is a precompiled library that links against 1670 ``libbar``, then linking against ``libfoo`` requires both 1671 ``libfoo`` and ``libbar`` to be available in the sysroot. 1672 Without a ``DEPENDS`` from the recipe that installs ``libfoo`` 1673 to the recipe that installs ``libbar``, other recipes might 1674 fail to link against ``libfoo``. 1675 1676 For information on runtime dependencies, see the 1677 :term:`RDEPENDS` variable. You can also see the 1678 ":ref:`Tasks <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:tasks>`" and 1679 ":ref:`Dependencies <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-execution:dependencies>`" sections in the 1680 BitBake User Manual for additional information on tasks and 1681 dependencies. 1682 1683 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR` 1684 Points to the general area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to 1685 place images, packages, SDKs, and other output files that are ready 1686 to be used outside of the build system. By default, this directory 1687 resides within the :term:`Build Directory` as 1688 ``${TMPDIR}/deploy``. 1689 1690 For more information on the structure of the Build Directory, see 1691 ":ref:`ref-manual/structure:the build directory - \`\`build/\`\``" section. 1692 For more detail on the contents of the ``deploy`` directory, see the 1693 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:images`", 1694 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`", and 1695 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:application development sdk`" sections all in the 1696 Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 1697 1698 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_DEB` 1699 Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place 1700 Debian packages that are ready to be used outside of the build 1701 system. This variable applies only when 1702 :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains 1703 "package_deb". 1704 1705 The BitBake configuration file initially defines the 1706 ``DEPLOY_DIR_DEB`` variable as a sub-folder of 1707 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`: 1708 :: 1709 1710 DEPLOY_DIR_DEB = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/deb" 1711 1712 The :ref:`package_deb <ref-classes-package_deb>` class uses the 1713 ``DEPLOY_DIR_DEB`` variable to make sure the 1714 :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_deb` task 1715 writes Debian packages into the appropriate folder. For more 1716 information on how packaging works, see the 1717 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section 1718 in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 1719 1720 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE` 1721 Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place 1722 images and other associated output files that are ready to be 1723 deployed onto the target machine. The directory is machine-specific 1724 as it contains the ``${MACHINE}`` name. By default, this directory 1725 resides within the :term:`Build Directory` as 1726 ``${DEPLOY_DIR}/images/${MACHINE}/``. 1727 1728 For more information on the structure of the Build Directory, see 1729 ":ref:`ref-manual/structure:the build directory - \`\`build/\`\``" section. 1730 For more detail on the contents of the ``deploy`` directory, see the 1731 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:images`" and 1732 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:application development sdk`" sections both in 1733 the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 1734 1735 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IPK` 1736 Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place 1737 IPK packages that are ready to be used outside of the build system. 1738 This variable applies only when 1739 :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains 1740 "package_ipk". 1741 1742 The BitBake configuration file initially defines this variable as a 1743 sub-folder of :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`: 1744 :: 1745 1746 DEPLOY_DIR_IPK = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/ipk" 1747 1748 The :ref:`package_ipk <ref-classes-package_ipk>` class uses the 1749 ``DEPLOY_DIR_IPK`` variable to make sure the 1750 :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_ipk` task 1751 writes IPK packages into the appropriate folder. For more information 1752 on how packaging works, see the 1753 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section 1754 in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 1755 1756 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_RPM` 1757 Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place 1758 RPM packages that are ready to be used outside of the build system. 1759 This variable applies only when 1760 :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains 1761 "package_rpm". 1762 1763 The BitBake configuration file initially defines this variable as a 1764 sub-folder of :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`: 1765 :: 1766 1767 DEPLOY_DIR_RPM = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/rpm" 1768 1769 The :ref:`package_rpm <ref-classes-package_rpm>` class uses the 1770 ``DEPLOY_DIR_RPM`` variable to make sure the 1771 :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_rpm` task 1772 writes RPM packages into the appropriate folder. For more information 1773 on how packaging works, see the 1774 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section 1775 in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 1776 1777 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_TAR` 1778 Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place 1779 tarballs that are ready to be used outside of the build system. This 1780 variable applies only when 1781 :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains 1782 "package_tar". 1783 1784 The BitBake configuration file initially defines this variable as a 1785 sub-folder of :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`: 1786 :: 1787 1788 DEPLOY_DIR_TAR = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/tar" 1789 1790 The :ref:`package_tar <ref-classes-package_tar>` class uses the 1791 ``DEPLOY_DIR_TAR`` variable to make sure the 1792 :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_tar` task 1793 writes TAR packages into the appropriate folder. For more information 1794 on how packaging works, see the 1795 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section 1796 in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 1797 1798 :term:`DEPLOYDIR` 1799 When inheriting the :ref:`deploy <ref-classes-deploy>` class, the 1800 ``DEPLOYDIR`` points to a temporary work area for deployed files that 1801 is set in the ``deploy`` class as follows: 1802 :: 1803 1804 DEPLOYDIR = "${WORKDIR}/deploy-${PN}" 1805 1806 Recipes inheriting the ``deploy`` class should copy files to be 1807 deployed into ``DEPLOYDIR``, and the class will take care of copying 1808 them into :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE` 1809 afterwards. 1810 1811 :term:`DESCRIPTION` 1812 The package description used by package managers. If not set, 1813 ``DESCRIPTION`` takes the value of the :term:`SUMMARY` 1814 variable. 1815 1816 :term:`DISTRO` 1817 The short name of the distribution. For information on the long name 1818 of the distribution, see the :term:`DISTRO_NAME` 1819 variable. 1820 1821 The ``DISTRO`` variable corresponds to a distribution configuration 1822 file whose root name is the same as the variable's argument and whose 1823 filename extension is ``.conf``. For example, the distribution 1824 configuration file for the Poky distribution is named ``poky.conf`` 1825 and resides in the ``meta-poky/conf/distro`` directory of the 1826 :term:`Source Directory`. 1827 1828 Within that ``poky.conf`` file, the ``DISTRO`` variable is set as 1829 follows: 1830 :: 1831 1832 DISTRO = "poky" 1833 1834 Distribution configuration files are located in a ``conf/distro`` 1835 directory within the :term:`Metadata` that contains the 1836 distribution configuration. The value for ``DISTRO`` must not contain 1837 spaces, and is typically all lower-case. 1838 1839 .. note:: 1840 1841 If the ``DISTRO`` variable is blank, a set of default configurations 1842 are used, which are specified within 1843 ``meta/conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf`` also in the Source Directory. 1844 1845 :term:`DISTRO_CODENAME` 1846 Specifies a codename for the distribution being built. 1847 1848 :term:`DISTRO_EXTRA_RDEPENDS` 1849 Specifies a list of distro-specific packages to add to all images. 1850 This variable takes affect through ``packagegroup-base`` so the 1851 variable only really applies to the more full-featured images that 1852 include ``packagegroup-base``. You can use this variable to keep 1853 distro policy out of generic images. As with all other distro 1854 variables, you set this variable in the distro ``.conf`` file. 1855 1856 :term:`DISTRO_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS` 1857 Specifies a list of distro-specific packages to add to all images if 1858 the packages exist. The packages might not exist or be empty (e.g. 1859 kernel modules). The list of packages are automatically installed but 1860 you can remove them. 1861 1862 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` 1863 The software support you want in your distribution for various 1864 features. You define your distribution features in the distribution 1865 configuration file. 1866 1867 In most cases, the presence or absence of a feature in 1868 ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` is translated to the appropriate option supplied 1869 to the configure script during the 1870 :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task for recipes that 1871 optionally support the feature. For example, specifying "x11" in 1872 ``DISTRO_FEATURES``, causes every piece of software built for the 1873 target that can optionally support X11 to have its X11 support 1874 enabled. 1875 1876 Two more examples are Bluetooth and NFS support. For a more complete 1877 list of features that ships with the Yocto Project and that you can 1878 provide with this variable, see the ":ref:`ref-features-distro`" section. 1879 1880 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL` 1881 Features to be added to ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` if not also present in 1882 ``DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED``. 1883 1884 This variable is set in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file. It is 1885 not intended to be user-configurable. It is best to just reference 1886 the variable to see which distro features are being backfilled for 1887 all distro configurations. See the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`" section 1888 for more information. 1889 1890 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED` 1891 Features from ``DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL`` that should not be 1892 backfilled (i.e. added to ``DISTRO_FEATURES``) during the build. See 1893 the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`" section for more information. 1894 1895 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_DEFAULT` 1896 A convenience variable that gives you the default list of distro 1897 features with the exception of any features specific to the C library 1898 (``libc``). 1899 1900 When creating a custom distribution, you might find it useful to be 1901 able to reuse the default 1902 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` options without the 1903 need to write out the full set. Here is an example that uses 1904 ``DISTRO_FEATURES_DEFAULT`` from a custom distro configuration file: 1905 :: 1906 1907 DISTRO_FEATURES ?= "${DISTRO_FEATURES_DEFAULT} myfeature" 1908 1909 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVE` 1910 Specifies a list of features that if present in the target 1911 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` value should be 1912 included in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` when building native recipes. This 1913 variable is used in addition to the features filtered using the 1914 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVE` 1915 variable. 1916 1917 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVESDK` 1918 Specifies a list of features that if present in the target 1919 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` value should be 1920 included in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` when building nativesdk recipes. This 1921 variable is used in addition to the features filtered using the 1922 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVESDK` 1923 variable. 1924 1925 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVE` 1926 Specifies a list of features that should be included in 1927 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` when building native 1928 recipes. This variable is used in addition to the features filtered 1929 using the 1930 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVE` 1931 variable. 1932 1933 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVESDK` 1934 Specifies a list of features that should be included in 1935 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` when building 1936 nativesdk recipes. This variable is used in addition to the features 1937 filtered using the 1938 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVESDK` 1939 variable. 1940 1941 :term:`DISTRO_NAME` 1942 The long name of the distribution. For information on the short name 1943 of the distribution, see the :term:`DISTRO` variable. 1944 1945 The ``DISTRO_NAME`` variable corresponds to a distribution 1946 configuration file whose root name is the same as the variable's 1947 argument and whose filename extension is ``.conf``. For example, the 1948 distribution configuration file for the Poky distribution is named 1949 ``poky.conf`` and resides in the ``meta-poky/conf/distro`` directory 1950 of the :term:`Source Directory`. 1951 1952 Within that ``poky.conf`` file, the ``DISTRO_NAME`` variable is set 1953 as follows: 1954 :: 1955 1956 DISTRO_NAME = "Poky (Yocto Project Reference Distro)" 1957 1958 Distribution configuration files are located in a ``conf/distro`` 1959 directory within the :term:`Metadata` that contains the 1960 distribution configuration. 1961 1962 .. note:: 1963 1964 If the ``DISTRO_NAME`` variable is blank, a set of default 1965 configurations are used, which are specified within 1966 ``meta/conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf`` also in the Source Directory. 1967 1968 :term:`DISTRO_VERSION` 1969 The version of the distribution. 1970 1971 :term:`DISTROOVERRIDES` 1972 A colon-separated list of overrides specific to the current 1973 distribution. By default, this list includes the value of 1974 :term:`DISTRO`. 1975 1976 You can extend ``DISTROOVERRIDES`` to add extra overrides that should 1977 apply to the distribution. 1978 1979 The underlying mechanism behind ``DISTROOVERRIDES`` is simply that it 1980 is included in the default value of 1981 :term:`OVERRIDES`. 1982 1983 :term:`DL_DIR` 1984 The central download directory used by the build process to store 1985 downloads. By default, ``DL_DIR`` gets files suitable for mirroring 1986 for everything except Git repositories. If you want tarballs of Git 1987 repositories, use the 1988 :term:`BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS` 1989 variable. 1990 1991 You can set this directory by defining the ``DL_DIR`` variable in the 1992 ``conf/local.conf`` file. This directory is self-maintaining and you 1993 should not have to touch it. By default, the directory is 1994 ``downloads`` in the :term:`Build Directory`. 1995 :: 1996 1997 #DL_DIR ?= "${TOPDIR}/downloads" 1998 1999 To specify a different download directory, 2000 simply remove the comment from the line and provide your directory. 2001 2002 During a first build, the system downloads many different source code 2003 tarballs from various upstream projects. Downloading can take a 2004 while, particularly if your network connection is slow. Tarballs are 2005 all stored in the directory defined by ``DL_DIR`` and the build 2006 system looks there first to find source tarballs. 2007 2008 .. note:: 2009 2010 When wiping and rebuilding, you can preserve this directory to 2011 speed up this part of subsequent builds. 2012 2013 You can safely share this directory between multiple builds on the 2014 same development machine. For additional information on how the build 2015 process gets source files when working behind a firewall or proxy 2016 server, see this specific question in the ":doc:`faq`" 2017 chapter. You can also refer to the 2018 ":yocto_wiki:`Working Behind a Network Proxy </Working_Behind_a_Network_Proxy>`" 2019 Wiki page. 2020 2021 :term:`DOC_COMPRESS` 2022 When inheriting the :ref:`compress_doc <ref-classes-compress_doc>` 2023 class, this variable sets the compression policy used when the 2024 OpenEmbedded build system compresses man pages and info pages. By 2025 default, the compression method used is gz (gzip). Other policies 2026 available are xz and bz2. 2027 2028 For information on policies and on how to use this variable, see the 2029 comments in the ``meta/classes/compress_doc.bbclass`` file. 2030 2031 :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` 2032 When building bootable images (i.e. where ``hddimg``, ``iso``, or 2033 ``wic.vmdk`` is in :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES`), the 2034 ``EFI_PROVIDER`` variable specifies the EFI bootloader to use. The 2035 default is "grub-efi", but "systemd-boot" can be used instead. 2036 2037 See the :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` and 2038 :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` classes for more 2039 information. 2040 2041 :term:`ENABLE_BINARY_LOCALE_GENERATION` 2042 Variable that controls which locales for ``glibc`` are generated 2043 during the build (useful if the target device has 64Mbytes of RAM or 2044 less). 2045 2046 :term:`ERR_REPORT_DIR` 2047 When used with the :ref:`report-error <ref-classes-report-error>` 2048 class, specifies the path used for storing the debug files created by 2049 the :ref:`error reporting 2050 tool <dev-manual/common-tasks:using the error reporting tool>`, which 2051 allows you to submit build errors you encounter to a central 2052 database. By default, the value of this variable is 2053 ``${``\ :term:`LOG_DIR`\ ``}/error-report``. 2054 2055 You can set ``ERR_REPORT_DIR`` to the path you want the error 2056 reporting tool to store the debug files as follows in your 2057 ``local.conf`` file: 2058 :: 2059 2060 ERR_REPORT_DIR = "path" 2061 2062 :term:`ERROR_QA` 2063 Specifies the quality assurance checks whose failures are reported as 2064 errors by the OpenEmbedded build system. You set this variable in 2065 your distribution configuration file. For a list of the checks you 2066 can control with this variable, see the 2067 ":ref:`insane.bbclass <ref-classes-insane>`" section. 2068 2069 :term:`EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS` 2070 Triggers the OpenEmbedded build system's shared libraries resolver to 2071 exclude an entire package when scanning for shared libraries. 2072 2073 .. note:: 2074 2075 The shared libraries resolver's functionality results in part from 2076 the internal function ``package_do_shlibs``, which is part of the 2077 :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task. You should be aware that the shared 2078 libraries resolver might implicitly define some dependencies between 2079 packages. 2080 2081 The ``EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS`` variable is similar to the 2082 :term:`PRIVATE_LIBS` variable, which excludes a 2083 package's particular libraries only and not the whole package. 2084 2085 Use the ``EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS`` variable by setting it to "1" for a 2086 particular package: 2087 :: 2088 2089 EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS = "1" 2090 2091 :term:`EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD` 2092 Directs BitBake to exclude a recipe from world builds (i.e. 2093 ``bitbake world``). During world builds, BitBake locates, parses and 2094 builds all recipes found in every layer exposed in the 2095 ``bblayers.conf`` configuration file. 2096 2097 To exclude a recipe from a world build using this variable, set the 2098 variable to "1" in the recipe. 2099 2100 .. note:: 2101 2102 Recipes added to ``EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD`` may still be built during a 2103 world build in order to satisfy dependencies of other recipes. Adding 2104 a recipe to ``EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD`` only ensures that the recipe is not 2105 explicitly added to the list of build targets in a world build. 2106 2107 :term:`EXTENDPE` 2108 Used with file and pathnames to create a prefix for a recipe's 2109 version based on the recipe's :term:`PE` value. If ``PE`` 2110 is set and greater than zero for a recipe, ``EXTENDPE`` becomes that 2111 value (e.g if ``PE`` is equal to "1" then ``EXTENDPE`` becomes "1"). 2112 If a recipe's ``PE`` is not set (the default) or is equal to zero, 2113 ``EXTENDPE`` becomes "". 2114 2115 See the :term:`STAMP` variable for an example. 2116 2117 :term:`EXTENDPKGV` 2118 The full package version specification as it appears on the final 2119 packages produced by a recipe. The variable's value is normally used 2120 to fix a runtime dependency to the exact same version of another 2121 package in the same recipe: 2122 :: 2123 2124 RDEPENDS_${PN}-additional-module = "${PN} (= ${EXTENDPKGV})" 2125 2126 The dependency relationships are intended to force the package 2127 manager to upgrade these types of packages in lock-step. 2128 2129 :term:`EXTERNAL_KERNEL_TOOLS` 2130 When set, the ``EXTERNAL_KERNEL_TOOLS`` variable indicates that these 2131 tools are not in the source tree. 2132 2133 When kernel tools are available in the tree, they are preferred over 2134 any externally installed tools. Setting the ``EXTERNAL_KERNEL_TOOLS`` 2135 variable tells the OpenEmbedded build system to prefer the installed 2136 external tools. See the 2137 :ref:`kernel-yocto <ref-classes-kernel-yocto>` class in 2138 ``meta/classes`` to see how the variable is used. 2139 2140 :term:`EXTERNALSRC` 2141 When inheriting the :ref:`externalsrc <ref-classes-externalsrc>` 2142 class, this variable points to the source tree, which is outside of 2143 the OpenEmbedded build system. When set, this variable sets the 2144 :term:`S` variable, which is what the OpenEmbedded build 2145 system uses to locate unpacked recipe source code. 2146 2147 For more information on ``externalsrc.bbclass``, see the 2148 ":ref:`externalsrc.bbclass <ref-classes-externalsrc>`" section. You 2149 can also find information on how to use this variable in the 2150 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building software from an external source`" 2151 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 2152 2153 :term:`EXTERNALSRC_BUILD` 2154 When inheriting the :ref:`externalsrc <ref-classes-externalsrc>` 2155 class, this variable points to the directory in which the recipe's 2156 source code is built, which is outside of the OpenEmbedded build 2157 system. When set, this variable sets the :term:`B` variable, 2158 which is what the OpenEmbedded build system uses to locate the Build 2159 Directory. 2160 2161 For more information on ``externalsrc.bbclass``, see the 2162 ":ref:`externalsrc.bbclass <ref-classes-externalsrc>`" section. You 2163 can also find information on how to use this variable in the 2164 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building software from an external source`" 2165 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 2166 2167 :term:`EXTRA_AUTORECONF` 2168 For recipes inheriting the :ref:`autotools <ref-classes-autotools>` 2169 class, you can use ``EXTRA_AUTORECONF`` to specify extra options to 2170 pass to the ``autoreconf`` command that is executed during the 2171 :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task. 2172 2173 The default value is "--exclude=autopoint". 2174 2175 :term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES` 2176 A list of additional features to include in an image. When listing 2177 more than one feature, separate them with a space. 2178 2179 Typically, you configure this variable in your ``local.conf`` file, 2180 which is found in the :term:`Build Directory`. 2181 Although you can use this variable from within a recipe, best 2182 practices dictate that you do not. 2183 2184 .. note:: 2185 2186 To enable primary features from within the image recipe, use the 2187 :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` variable. 2188 2189 Here are some examples of features you can add: 2190 2191 - "dbg-pkgs" - Adds -dbg packages for all installed packages including 2192 symbol information for debugging and profiling. 2193 2194 - "debug-tweaks" - Makes an image suitable for debugging. For example, allows root logins without passwords and 2195 enables post-installation logging. See the 'allow-empty-password' and 2196 'post-install-logging' features in the ":ref:`ref-features-image`" 2197 section for more information. 2198 - "dev-pkgs" - Adds -dev packages for all installed packages. This is 2199 useful if you want to develop against the libraries in the image. 2200 - "read-only-rootfs" - Creates an image whose root filesystem is 2201 read-only. See the 2202 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating a read-only root filesystem`" 2203 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for more 2204 information 2205 - "tools-debug" - Adds debugging tools such as gdb and strace. 2206 - "tools-sdk" - Adds development tools such as gcc, make, 2207 pkgconfig and so forth. 2208 - "tools-testapps" - Adds useful testing tools 2209 such as ts_print, aplay, arecord and so forth. 2210 2211 For a complete list of image features that ships with the Yocto 2212 Project, see the ":ref:`ref-features-image`" section. 2213 2214 For an example that shows how to customize your image by using this 2215 variable, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:customizing images using custom \`\`image_features\`\` and \`\`extra_image_features\`\``" 2216 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 2217 2218 :term:`EXTRA_IMAGECMD` 2219 Specifies additional options for the image creation command that has 2220 been specified in :term:`IMAGE_CMD`. When setting 2221 this variable, use an override for the associated image type. Here is 2222 an example: 2223 :: 2224 2225 EXTRA_IMAGECMD_ext3 ?= "-i 4096" 2226 2227 :term:`EXTRA_IMAGEDEPENDS` 2228 A list of recipes to build that do not provide packages for 2229 installing into the root filesystem. 2230 2231 Sometimes a recipe is required to build the final image but is not 2232 needed in the root filesystem. You can use the ``EXTRA_IMAGEDEPENDS`` 2233 variable to list these recipes and thus specify the dependencies. A 2234 typical example is a required bootloader in a machine configuration. 2235 2236 .. note:: 2237 2238 To add packages to the root filesystem, see the various 2239 :term:`RDEPENDS` and :term:`RRECOMMENDS` variables. 2240 2241 :term:`EXTRANATIVEPATH` 2242 A list of subdirectories of 2243 ``${``\ :term:`STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE`\ ``}`` 2244 added to the beginning of the environment variable ``PATH``. As an 2245 example, the following prepends 2246 "${STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE}/foo:${STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE}/bar:" to 2247 ``PATH``: 2248 :: 2249 2250 EXTRANATIVEPATH = "foo bar" 2251 2252 :term:`EXTRA_OECMAKE` 2253 Additional `CMake <https://cmake.org/overview/>`__ options. See the 2254 :ref:`cmake <ref-classes-cmake>` class for additional information. 2255 2256 :term:`EXTRA_OECONF` 2257 Additional ``configure`` script options. See 2258 :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS` for 2259 additional information on passing configure script options. 2260 2261 :term:`EXTRA_OEMAKE` 2262 Additional GNU ``make`` options. 2263 2264 Because the ``EXTRA_OEMAKE`` defaults to "", you need to set the 2265 variable to specify any required GNU options. 2266 2267 :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` and 2268 :term:`PARALLEL_MAKEINST` also make use of 2269 ``EXTRA_OEMAKE`` to pass the required flags. 2270 2271 :term:`EXTRA_OESCONS` 2272 When inheriting the :ref:`scons <ref-classes-scons>` class, this 2273 variable specifies additional configuration options you want to pass 2274 to the ``scons`` command line. 2275 2276 :term:`EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS` 2277 When inheriting the :ref:`extrausers <ref-classes-extrausers>` 2278 class, this variable provides image level user and group operations. 2279 This is a more global method of providing user and group 2280 configuration as compared to using the 2281 :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class, which ties user and 2282 group configurations to a specific recipe. 2283 2284 The set list of commands you can configure using the 2285 ``EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS`` is shown in the ``extrausers`` class. These 2286 commands map to the normal Unix commands of the same names: 2287 :: 2288 2289 # EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS = "\ 2290 # useradd -p '' tester; \ 2291 # groupadd developers; \ 2292 # userdel nobody; \ 2293 # groupdel -g video; \ 2294 # groupmod -g 1020 developers; \ 2295 # usermod -s /bin/sh tester; \ 2296 # " 2297 2298 :term:`FEATURE_PACKAGES` 2299 Defines one or more packages to include in an image when a specific 2300 item is included in :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`. 2301 When setting the value, ``FEATURE_PACKAGES`` should have the name of 2302 the feature item as an override. Here is an example: 2303 :: 2304 2305 FEATURE_PACKAGES_widget = "package1 package2" 2306 2307 In this example, if "widget" were added to ``IMAGE_FEATURES``, 2308 package1 and package2 would be included in the image. 2309 2310 .. note:: 2311 2312 Packages installed by features defined through ``FEATURE_PACKAGES`` 2313 are often package groups. While similarly named, you should not 2314 confuse the ``FEATURE_PACKAGES`` variable with package groups, which 2315 are discussed elsewhere in the documentation. 2316 2317 :term:`FEED_DEPLOYDIR_BASE_URI` 2318 Points to the base URL of the server and location within the 2319 document-root that provides the metadata and packages required by 2320 OPKG to support runtime package management of IPK packages. You set 2321 this variable in your ``local.conf`` file. 2322 2323 Consider the following example: 2324 :: 2325 2326 FEED_DEPLOYDIR_BASE_URI = "http://192.168.7.1/BOARD-dir" 2327 2328 This example assumes you are serving 2329 your packages over HTTP and your databases are located in a directory 2330 named ``BOARD-dir``, which is underneath your HTTP server's 2331 document-root. In this case, the OpenEmbedded build system generates 2332 a set of configuration files for you in your target that work with 2333 the feed. 2334 2335 :term:`FILES` 2336 The list of files and directories that are placed in a package. The 2337 :term:`PACKAGES` variable lists the packages 2338 generated by a recipe. 2339 2340 To use the ``FILES`` variable, provide a package name override that 2341 identifies the resulting package. Then, provide a space-separated 2342 list of files or paths that identify the files you want included as 2343 part of the resulting package. Here is an example: 2344 :: 2345 2346 FILES_${PN} += "${bindir}/mydir1 ${bindir}/mydir2/myfile" 2347 2348 .. note:: 2349 2350 - When specifying files or paths, you can pattern match using 2351 Python's 2352 `glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`_ 2353 syntax. For details on the syntax, see the documentation by 2354 following the previous link. 2355 2356 - When specifying paths as part of the ``FILES`` variable, it is 2357 good practice to use appropriate path variables. For example, 2358 use ``${sysconfdir}`` rather than ``/etc``, or ``${bindir}`` 2359 rather than ``/usr/bin``. You can find a list of these 2360 variables at the top of the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file in 2361 the :term:`Source Directory`. You will also 2362 find the default values of the various ``FILES_*`` variables in 2363 this file. 2364 2365 If some of the files you provide with the ``FILES`` variable are 2366 editable and you know they should not be overwritten during the 2367 package update process by the Package Management System (PMS), you 2368 can identify these files so that the PMS will not overwrite them. See 2369 the :term:`CONFFILES` variable for information on 2370 how to identify these files to the PMS. 2371 2372 :term:`FILES_SOLIBSDEV` 2373 Defines the file specification to match 2374 :term:`SOLIBSDEV`. In other words, 2375 ``FILES_SOLIBSDEV`` defines the full path name of the development 2376 symbolic link (symlink) for shared libraries on the target platform. 2377 2378 The following statement from the ``bitbake.conf`` shows how it is 2379 set: 2380 :: 2381 2382 FILES_SOLIBSDEV ?= "${base_libdir}/lib*${SOLIBSDEV} ${libdir}/lib*${SOLIBSDEV}" 2383 2384 :term:`FILESEXTRAPATHS` 2385 Extends the search path the OpenEmbedded build system uses when 2386 looking for files and patches as it processes recipes and append 2387 files. The default directories BitBake uses when it processes recipes 2388 are initially defined by the :term:`FILESPATH` 2389 variable. You can extend ``FILESPATH`` variable by using 2390 ``FILESEXTRAPATHS``. 2391 2392 Best practices dictate that you accomplish this by using 2393 ``FILESEXTRAPATHS`` from within a ``.bbappend`` file and that you 2394 prepend paths as follows: 2395 :: 2396 2397 FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/${PN}:" 2398 2399 In the above example, the build system first 2400 looks for files in a directory that has the same name as the 2401 corresponding append file. 2402 2403 .. note:: 2404 2405 When extending ``FILESEXTRAPATHS``, be sure to use the immediate 2406 expansion (``:=``) operator. Immediate expansion makes sure that 2407 BitBake evaluates :term:`THISDIR` at the time the 2408 directive is encountered rather than at some later time when 2409 expansion might result in a directory that does not contain the 2410 files you need. 2411 2412 Also, include the trailing separating colon character if you are 2413 prepending. The trailing colon character is necessary because you 2414 are directing BitBake to extend the path by prepending directories 2415 to the search path. 2416 2417 Here is another common use: 2418 :: 2419 2420 FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/files:" 2421 2422 In this example, the build system extends the 2423 ``FILESPATH`` variable to include a directory named ``files`` that is 2424 in the same directory as the corresponding append file. 2425 2426 This next example specifically adds three paths: 2427 :: 2428 2429 FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "path_1:path_2:path_3:" 2430 2431 A final example shows how you can extend the search path and include 2432 a :term:`MACHINE`-specific override, which is useful 2433 in a BSP layer: 2434 :: 2435 2436 FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend_intel-x86-common := "${THISDIR}/${PN}:" 2437 2438 The previous statement appears in the 2439 ``linux-yocto-dev.bbappend`` file, which is found in the 2440 :ref:`overview-manual/development-environment:yocto project source repositories` in 2441 ``meta-intel/common/recipes-kernel/linux``. Here, the machine 2442 override is a special :term:`PACKAGE_ARCH` 2443 definition for multiple ``meta-intel`` machines. 2444 2445 .. note:: 2446 2447 For a layer that supports a single BSP, the override could just be 2448 the value of ``MACHINE``. 2449 2450 By prepending paths in ``.bbappend`` files, you allow multiple append 2451 files that reside in different layers but are used for the same 2452 recipe to correctly extend the path. 2453 2454 :term:`FILESOVERRIDES` 2455 A subset of :term:`OVERRIDES` used by the 2456 OpenEmbedded build system for creating 2457 :term:`FILESPATH`. The ``FILESOVERRIDES`` variable 2458 uses overrides to automatically extend the 2459 :term:`FILESPATH` variable. For an example of how 2460 that works, see the :term:`FILESPATH` variable 2461 description. Additionally, you find more information on how overrides 2462 are handled in the 2463 ":ref:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:conditional syntax (overrides)`" 2464 section of the BitBake User Manual. 2465 2466 By default, the ``FILESOVERRIDES`` variable is defined as: 2467 :: 2468 2469 FILESOVERRIDES = "${TRANSLATED_TARGET_ARCH}:${MACHINEOVERRIDES}:${DISTROOVERRIDES}" 2470 2471 .. note:: 2472 2473 Do not hand-edit the ``FILESOVERRIDES`` variable. The values match up 2474 with expected overrides and are used in an expected manner by the 2475 build system. 2476 2477 :term:`FILESPATH` 2478 The default set of directories the OpenEmbedded build system uses 2479 when searching for patches and files. 2480 2481 During the build process, BitBake searches each directory in 2482 ``FILESPATH`` in the specified order when looking for files and 2483 patches specified by each ``file://`` URI in a recipe's 2484 :term:`SRC_URI` statements. 2485 2486 The default value for the ``FILESPATH`` variable is defined in the 2487 ``base.bbclass`` class found in ``meta/classes`` in the 2488 :term:`Source Directory`: 2489 :: 2490 2491 FILESPATH = "${@base_set_filespath(["${FILE_DIRNAME}/${BP}", \ 2492 "${FILE_DIRNAME}/${BPN}", "${FILE_DIRNAME}/files"], d)}" 2493 2494 The 2495 ``FILESPATH`` variable is automatically extended using the overrides 2496 from the :term:`FILESOVERRIDES` variable. 2497 2498 .. note:: 2499 2500 - Do not hand-edit the ``FILESPATH`` variable. If you want the 2501 build system to look in directories other than the defaults, 2502 extend the ``FILESPATH`` variable by using the 2503 :term:`FILESEXTRAPATHS` variable. 2504 2505 - Be aware that the default ``FILESPATH`` directories do not map 2506 to directories in custom layers where append files 2507 (``.bbappend``) are used. If you want the build system to find 2508 patches or files that reside with your append files, you need 2509 to extend the ``FILESPATH`` variable by using the 2510 ``FILESEXTRAPATHS`` variable. 2511 2512 You can take advantage of this searching behavior in useful ways. For 2513 example, consider a case where the following directory structure 2514 exists for general and machine-specific configurations: 2515 :: 2516 2517 files/defconfig 2518 files/MACHINEA/defconfig 2519 files/MACHINEB/defconfig 2520 2521 Also in the example, the ``SRC_URI`` statement contains 2522 "file://defconfig". Given this scenario, you can set 2523 :term:`MACHINE` to "MACHINEA" and cause the build 2524 system to use files from ``files/MACHINEA``. Set ``MACHINE`` to 2525 "MACHINEB" and the build system uses files from ``files/MACHINEB``. 2526 Finally, for any machine other than "MACHINEA" and "MACHINEB", the 2527 build system uses files from ``files/defconfig``. 2528 2529 You can find out more about the patching process in the 2530 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:patching`" section 2531 in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual and the 2532 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:patching code`" section in 2533 the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. See the 2534 :ref:`ref-tasks-patch` task as well. 2535 2536 :term:`FILESYSTEM_PERMS_TABLES` 2537 Allows you to define your own file permissions settings table as part 2538 of your configuration for the packaging process. For example, suppose 2539 you need a consistent set of custom permissions for a set of groups 2540 and users across an entire work project. It is best to do this in the 2541 packages themselves but this is not always possible. 2542 2543 By default, the OpenEmbedded build system uses the ``fs-perms.txt``, 2544 which is located in the ``meta/files`` folder in the :term:`Source Directory`. 2545 If you create your own file 2546 permissions setting table, you should place it in your layer or the 2547 distro's layer. 2548 2549 You define the ``FILESYSTEM_PERMS_TABLES`` variable in the 2550 ``conf/local.conf`` file, which is found in the :term:`Build Directory`, 2551 to point to your custom 2552 ``fs-perms.txt``. You can specify more than a single file permissions 2553 setting table. The paths you specify to these files must be defined 2554 within the :term:`BBPATH` variable. 2555 2556 For guidance on how to create your own file permissions settings 2557 table file, examine the existing ``fs-perms.txt``. 2558 2559 :term:`FIT_DESC` 2560 Specifies the description string encoded into a fitImage. The default 2561 value is set by the :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` 2562 class as follows:: 2563 2564 FIT_DESC ?= "U-Boot fitImage for ${DISTRO_NAME}/${PV}/${MACHINE}" 2565 2566 :term:`FIT_GENERATE_KEYS` 2567 Decides whether to generate the keys for signing fitImage if they 2568 don't already exist. The keys are created in ``UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR``. 2569 The default value is 0. 2570 2571 :term:`FIT_HASH_ALG` 2572 Specifies the hash algorithm used in creating the FIT Image. For e.g. sha256. 2573 2574 :term:`FIT_KEY_GENRSA_ARGS` 2575 Arguments to openssl genrsa for generating RSA private key for signing 2576 fitImage. The default value is "-F4". i.e. the public exponent 65537 to 2577 use. 2578 2579 :term:`FIT_KEY_REQ_ARGS` 2580 Arguments to openssl req for generating certificate for signing fitImage. 2581 The default value is "-batch -new". batch for non interactive mode 2582 and new for generating new keys. 2583 2584 :term:`FIT_KEY_SIGN_PKCS` 2585 Format for public key ceritifcate used in signing fitImage. 2586 The default value is "x509". 2587 2588 :term:`FIT_SIGN_ALG` 2589 Specifies the signature algorithm used in creating the FIT Image. 2590 For e.g. rsa2048. 2591 2592 :term:`FIT_SIGN_NUMBITS` 2593 Size of private key in number of bits used in fitImage. The default 2594 value is "2048". 2595 2596 :term:`FIT_SIGN_INDIVIDUAL` 2597 If set to "1", then the :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` 2598 class will sign the kernel, dtb and ramdisk images individually in addition 2599 to signing the fitImage itself. This could be useful if you are 2600 intending to verify signatures in another context than booting via 2601 U-Boot. 2602 2603 :term:`FONT_EXTRA_RDEPENDS` 2604 When inheriting the :ref:`fontcache <ref-classes-fontcache>` class, 2605 this variable specifies the runtime dependencies for font packages. 2606 By default, the ``FONT_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`` is set to "fontconfig-utils". 2607 2608 :term:`FONT_PACKAGES` 2609 When inheriting the :ref:`fontcache <ref-classes-fontcache>` class, 2610 this variable identifies packages containing font files that need to 2611 be cached by Fontconfig. By default, the ``fontcache`` class assumes 2612 that fonts are in the recipe's main package (i.e. 2613 ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``). Use this variable if fonts you 2614 need are in a package other than that main package. 2615 2616 :term:`FORCE_RO_REMOVE` 2617 Forces the removal of the packages listed in ``ROOTFS_RO_UNNEEDED`` 2618 during the generation of the root filesystem. 2619 2620 Set the variable to "1" to force the removal of these packages. 2621 2622 :term:`FULL_OPTIMIZATION` 2623 The options to pass in ``TARGET_CFLAGS`` and ``CFLAGS`` when 2624 compiling an optimized system. This variable defaults to "-O2 -pipe 2625 ${DEBUG_FLAGS}". 2626 2627 :term:`GCCPIE` 2628 Enables Position Independent Executables (PIE) within the GNU C 2629 Compiler (GCC). Enabling PIE in the GCC makes Return Oriented 2630 Programming (ROP) attacks much more difficult to execute. 2631 2632 By default the ``security_flags.inc`` file enables PIE by setting the 2633 variable as follows: 2634 :: 2635 2636 GCCPIE ?= "--enable-default-pie" 2637 2638 :term:`GCCVERSION` 2639 Specifies the default version of the GNU C Compiler (GCC) used for 2640 compilation. By default, ``GCCVERSION`` is set to "8.x" in the 2641 ``meta/conf/distro/include/tcmode-default.inc`` include file: 2642 :: 2643 2644 GCCVERSION ?= "8.%" 2645 2646 You can override this value by setting it in a 2647 configuration file such as the ``local.conf``. 2648 2649 :term:`GDB` 2650 The minimal command and arguments to run the GNU Debugger. 2651 2652 :term:`GITDIR` 2653 The directory in which a local copy of a Git repository is stored 2654 when it is cloned. 2655 2656 :term:`GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES` 2657 Specifies the list of GLIBC locales to generate should you not wish 2658 to generate all LIBC locals, which can be time consuming. 2659 2660 .. note:: 2661 2662 If you specifically remove the locale ``en_US.UTF-8``, you must set 2663 :term:`IMAGE_LINGUAS` appropriately. 2664 2665 You can set ``GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES`` in your ``local.conf`` file. 2666 By default, all locales are generated. 2667 :: 2668 2669 GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES = "en_GB.UTF-8 en_US.UTF-8" 2670 2671 :term:`GROUPADD_PARAM` 2672 When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class, 2673 this variable specifies for a package what parameters should be 2674 passed to the ``groupadd`` command if you wish to add a group to the 2675 system when the package is installed. 2676 2677 Here is an example from the ``dbus`` recipe: 2678 :: 2679 2680 GROUPADD_PARAM_${PN} = "-r netdev" 2681 2682 For information on the standard Linux shell command 2683 ``groupadd``, see https://linux.die.net/man/8/groupadd. 2684 2685 :term:`GROUPMEMS_PARAM` 2686 When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class, 2687 this variable specifies for a package what parameters should be 2688 passed to the ``groupmems`` command if you wish to modify the members 2689 of a group when the package is installed. 2690 2691 For information on the standard Linux shell command ``groupmems``, 2692 see https://linux.die.net/man/8/groupmems. 2693 2694 :term:`GRUB_GFXSERIAL` 2695 Configures the GNU GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB) to have graphics 2696 and serial in the boot menu. Set this variable to "1" in your 2697 ``local.conf`` or distribution configuration file to enable graphics 2698 and serial in the menu. 2699 2700 See the :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more 2701 information on how this variable is used. 2702 2703 :term:`GRUB_OPTS` 2704 Additional options to add to the GNU GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB) 2705 configuration. Use a semi-colon character (``;``) to separate 2706 multiple options. 2707 2708 The ``GRUB_OPTS`` variable is optional. See the 2709 :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more information 2710 on how this variable is used. 2711 2712 :term:`GRUB_TIMEOUT` 2713 Specifies the timeout before executing the default ``LABEL`` in the 2714 GNU GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB). 2715 2716 The ``GRUB_TIMEOUT`` variable is optional. See the 2717 :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more information 2718 on how this variable is used. 2719 2720 :term:`GTKIMMODULES_PACKAGES` 2721 When inheriting the 2722 :ref:`gtk-immodules-cache <ref-classes-gtk-immodules-cache>` class, 2723 this variable specifies the packages that contain the GTK+ input 2724 method modules being installed when the modules are in packages other 2725 than the main package. 2726 2727 :term:`HOMEPAGE` 2728 Website where more information about the software the recipe is 2729 building can be found. 2730 2731 :term:`HOST_ARCH` 2732 The name of the target architecture, which is normally the same as 2733 :term:`TARGET_ARCH`. The OpenEmbedded build system 2734 supports many architectures. Here is an example list of architectures 2735 supported. This list is by no means complete as the architecture is 2736 configurable: 2737 2738 - arm 2739 - i586 2740 - x86_64 2741 - powerpc 2742 - powerpc64 2743 - mips 2744 - mipsel 2745 2746 :term:`HOST_CC_ARCH` 2747 Specifies architecture-specific compiler flags that are passed to the 2748 C compiler. 2749 2750 Default initialization for ``HOST_CC_ARCH`` varies depending on what 2751 is being built: 2752 2753 - :term:`TARGET_CC_ARCH` when building for the 2754 target 2755 2756 - :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH` when building for the build host (i.e. 2757 ``-native``) 2758 2759 - ``BUILDSDK_CC_ARCH`` when building for an SDK (i.e. 2760 ``nativesdk-``) 2761 2762 :term:`HOST_OS` 2763 Specifies the name of the target operating system, which is normally 2764 the same as the :term:`TARGET_OS`. The variable can 2765 be set to "linux" for ``glibc``-based systems and to "linux-musl" for 2766 ``musl``. For ARM/EABI targets, there are also "linux-gnueabi" and 2767 "linux-musleabi" values possible. 2768 2769 :term:`HOST_PREFIX` 2770 Specifies the prefix for the cross-compile toolchain. ``HOST_PREFIX`` 2771 is normally the same as :term:`TARGET_PREFIX`. 2772 2773 :term:`HOST_SYS` 2774 Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating 2775 system, for which the build is occurring in the context of the 2776 current recipe. 2777 2778 The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based 2779 on :term:`HOST_ARCH`, 2780 :term:`HOST_VENDOR`, and 2781 :term:`HOST_OS` variables. 2782 2783 .. note:: 2784 2785 You do not need to set the variable yourself. 2786 2787 Consider these two examples: 2788 2789 - Given a native recipe on a 32-bit x86 machine running Linux, the 2790 value is "i686-linux". 2791 2792 - Given a recipe being built for a little-endian MIPS target running 2793 Linux, the value might be "mipsel-linux". 2794 2795 :term:`HOSTTOOLS` 2796 A space-separated list (filter) of tools on the build host that 2797 should be allowed to be called from within build tasks. Using this 2798 filter helps reduce the possibility of host contamination. If a tool 2799 specified in the value of ``HOSTTOOLS`` is not found on the build 2800 host, the OpenEmbedded build system produces an error and the build 2801 is not started. 2802 2803 For additional information, see 2804 :term:`HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL`. 2805 2806 :term:`HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL` 2807 A space-separated list (filter) of tools on the build host that 2808 should be allowed to be called from within build tasks. Using this 2809 filter helps reduce the possibility of host contamination. Unlike 2810 :term:`HOSTTOOLS`, the OpenEmbedded build system 2811 does not produce an error if a tool specified in the value of 2812 ``HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL`` is not found on the build host. Thus, you can 2813 use ``HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL`` to filter optional host tools. 2814 2815 :term:`HOST_VENDOR` 2816 Specifies the name of the vendor. ``HOST_VENDOR`` is normally the 2817 same as :term:`TARGET_VENDOR`. 2818 2819 :term:`ICECC_DISABLED` 2820 Disables or enables the ``icecc`` (Icecream) function. For more 2821 information on this function and best practices for using this 2822 variable, see the ":ref:`icecc.bbclass <ref-classes-icecc>`" 2823 section. 2824 2825 Setting this variable to "1" in your ``local.conf`` disables the 2826 function: 2827 :: 2828 2829 ICECC_DISABLED ??= "1" 2830 2831 To enable the function, set the variable as follows: 2832 :: 2833 2834 ICECC_DISABLED = "" 2835 2836 :term:`ICECC_ENV_EXEC` 2837 Points to the ``icecc-create-env`` script that you provide. This 2838 variable is used by the :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You 2839 set this variable in your ``local.conf`` file. 2840 2841 If you do not point to a script that you provide, the OpenEmbedded 2842 build system uses the default script provided by the 2843 ``icecc-create-env.bb`` recipe, which is a modified version and not 2844 the one that comes with ``icecc``. 2845 2846 :term:`ICECC_PARALLEL_MAKE` 2847 Extra options passed to the ``make`` command during the 2848 :ref:`ref-tasks-compile` task that specify parallel 2849 compilation. This variable usually takes the form of "-j x", where x 2850 represents the maximum number of parallel threads ``make`` can run. 2851 2852 .. note:: 2853 2854 The options passed affect builds on all enabled machines on the 2855 network, which are machines running the ``iceccd`` daemon. 2856 2857 If your enabled machines support multiple cores, coming up with the 2858 maximum number of parallel threads that gives you the best 2859 performance could take some experimentation since machine speed, 2860 network lag, available memory, and existing machine loads can all 2861 affect build time. Consequently, unlike the 2862 :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` variable, there is no 2863 rule-of-thumb for setting ``ICECC_PARALLEL_MAKE`` to achieve optimal 2864 performance. 2865 2866 If you do not set ``ICECC_PARALLEL_MAKE``, the build system does not 2867 use it (i.e. the system does not detect and assign the number of 2868 cores as is done with ``PARALLEL_MAKE``). 2869 2870 :term:`ICECC_PATH` 2871 The location of the ``icecc`` binary. You can set this variable in 2872 your ``local.conf`` file. If your ``local.conf`` file does not define 2873 this variable, the :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class attempts 2874 to define it by locating ``icecc`` using ``which``. 2875 2876 :term:`ICECC_USER_CLASS_BL` 2877 Identifies user classes that you do not want the Icecream distributed 2878 compile support to consider. This variable is used by the 2879 :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You set this variable in 2880 your ``local.conf`` file. 2881 2882 When you list classes using this variable, you are "blacklisting" 2883 them from distributed compilation across remote hosts. Any classes 2884 you list will be distributed and compiled locally. 2885 2886 :term:`ICECC_USER_PACKAGE_BL` 2887 Identifies user recipes that you do not want the Icecream distributed 2888 compile support to consider. This variable is used by the 2889 :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You set this variable in 2890 your ``local.conf`` file. 2891 2892 When you list packages using this variable, you are "blacklisting" 2893 them from distributed compilation across remote hosts. Any packages 2894 you list will be distributed and compiled locally. 2895 2896 :term:`ICECC_USER_PACKAGE_WL` 2897 Identifies user recipes that use an empty 2898 :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` variable that you want to 2899 force remote distributed compilation on using the Icecream 2900 distributed compile support. This variable is used by the 2901 :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You set this variable in 2902 your ``local.conf`` file. 2903 2904 :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME` 2905 The base name of image output files. This variable defaults to the 2906 recipe name (``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``). 2907 2908 :term:`IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES` 2909 A space-separated list of files installed into the boot partition 2910 when preparing an image using the Wic tool with the 2911 ``bootimg-efi`` source plugin. By default, 2912 the files are 2913 installed under the same name as the source files. To change the 2914 installed name, separate it from the original name with a semi-colon 2915 (;). Source files need to be located in 2916 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE`. Here are two 2917 examples: 2918 :: 2919 2920 IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "${KERNEL_IMAGETYPE};bz2" 2921 IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "${KERNEL_IMAGETYPE} microcode.cpio" 2922 2923 Alternatively, source files can be picked up using a glob pattern. In 2924 this case, the destination file must have the same name as the base 2925 name of the source file path. To install files into a directory 2926 within the target location, pass its name after a semi-colon (;). 2927 Here are two examples: 2928 :: 2929 2930 IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "boot/loader/*" 2931 IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "boot/loader/*;boot/" 2932 2933 The first example 2934 installs all files from ``${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/boot/loader/`` 2935 into the root of the target partition. The second example installs 2936 the same files into a ``boot`` directory within the target partition. 2937 2938 You can find information on how to use the Wic tool in the 2939 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating partitioned images using wic`" 2940 section of the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. Reference 2941 material for Wic is located in the 2942 ":doc:`/ref-manual/kickstart`" chapter. 2943 2944 :term:`IMAGE_BOOT_FILES` 2945 A space-separated list of files installed into the boot partition 2946 when preparing an image using the Wic tool with the 2947 ``bootimg-partition`` source plugin. By default, 2948 the files are 2949 installed under the same name as the source files. To change the 2950 installed name, separate it from the original name with a semi-colon 2951 (;). Source files need to be located in 2952 :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE`. Here are two 2953 examples: 2954 :: 2955 2956 IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "u-boot.img uImage;kernel" 2957 IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "u-boot.${UBOOT_SUFFIX} ${KERNEL_IMAGETYPE}" 2958 2959 Alternatively, source files can be picked up using a glob pattern. In 2960 this case, the destination file must have the same name as the base 2961 name of the source file path. To install files into a directory 2962 within the target location, pass its name after a semi-colon (;). 2963 Here are two examples: 2964 :: 2965 2966 IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "bcm2835-bootfiles/*" 2967 IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "bcm2835-bootfiles/*;boot/" 2968 2969 The first example 2970 installs all files from ``${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/bcm2835-bootfiles`` 2971 into the root of the target partition. The second example installs 2972 the same files into a ``boot`` directory within the target partition. 2973 2974 You can find information on how to use the Wic tool in the 2975 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating partitioned images using wic`" 2976 section of the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. Reference 2977 material for Wic is located in the 2978 ":doc:`/ref-manual/kickstart`" chapter. 2979 2980 :term:`IMAGE_CLASSES` 2981 A list of classes that all images should inherit. You typically use 2982 this variable to specify the list of classes that register the 2983 different types of images the OpenEmbedded build system creates. 2984 2985 The default value for ``IMAGE_CLASSES`` is ``image_types``. You can 2986 set this variable in your ``local.conf`` or in a distribution 2987 configuration file. 2988 2989 For more information, see ``meta/classes/image_types.bbclass`` in the 2990 :term:`Source Directory`. 2991 2992 :term:`IMAGE_CMD` 2993 Specifies the command to create the image file for a specific image 2994 type, which corresponds to the value set set in 2995 :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES`, (e.g. ``ext3``, 2996 ``btrfs``, and so forth). When setting this variable, you should use 2997 an override for the associated type. Here is an example: 2998 :: 2999 3000 IMAGE_CMD_jffs2 = "mkfs.jffs2 --root=${IMAGE_ROOTFS} \ 3001 --faketime --output=${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/${IMAGE_NAME}.rootfs.jffs2 \ 3002 ${EXTRA_IMAGECMD}" 3003 3004 You typically do not need to set this variable unless you are adding 3005 support for a new image type. For more examples on how to set this 3006 variable, see the :ref:`image_types <ref-classes-image_types>` 3007 class file, which is ``meta/classes/image_types.bbclass``. 3008 3009 :term:`IMAGE_DEVICE_TABLES` 3010 Specifies one or more files that contain custom device tables that 3011 are passed to the ``makedevs`` command as part of creating an image. 3012 These files list basic device nodes that should be created under 3013 ``/dev`` within the image. If ``IMAGE_DEVICE_TABLES`` is not set, 3014 ``files/device_table-minimal.txt`` is used, which is located by 3015 :term:`BBPATH`. For details on how you should write 3016 device table files, see ``meta/files/device_table-minimal.txt`` as an 3017 example. 3018 3019 :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` 3020 The primary list of features to include in an image. Typically, you 3021 configure this variable in an image recipe. Although you can use this 3022 variable from your ``local.conf`` file, which is found in the 3023 :term:`Build Directory`, best practices dictate that you do 3024 not. 3025 3026 .. note:: 3027 3028 To enable extra features from outside the image recipe, use the 3029 :term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES` variable. 3030 3031 For a list of image features that ships with the Yocto Project, see 3032 the ":ref:`ref-features-image`" section. 3033 3034 For an example that shows how to customize your image by using this 3035 variable, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:customizing images using custom \`\`image_features\`\` and \`\`extra_image_features\`\``" 3036 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 3037 3038 :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` 3039 Specifies the formats the OpenEmbedded build system uses during the 3040 build when creating the root filesystem. For example, setting 3041 ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` as follows causes the build system to create root 3042 filesystems using two formats: ``.ext3`` and ``.tar.bz2``: 3043 :: 3044 3045 IMAGE_FSTYPES = "ext3 tar.bz2" 3046 3047 For the complete list of supported image formats from which you can 3048 choose, see :term:`IMAGE_TYPES`. 3049 3050 .. note:: 3051 3052 - If an image recipe uses the "inherit image" line and you are 3053 setting ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` inside the recipe, you must set 3054 ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` prior to using the "inherit image" line. 3055 3056 - Due to the way the OpenEmbedded build system processes this 3057 variable, you cannot update its contents by using ``_append`` 3058 or ``_prepend``. You must use the ``+=`` operator to add one or 3059 more options to the ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` variable. 3060 3061 :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL` 3062 Used by recipes to specify the packages to install into an image 3063 through the :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` class. Use the 3064 ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` variable with care to avoid ordering issues. 3065 3066 Image recipes set ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` to specify the packages to 3067 install into an image through ``image.bbclass``. Additionally, 3068 "helper" classes such as the 3069 :ref:`core-image <ref-classes-core-image>` class exist that can 3070 take lists used with ``IMAGE_FEATURES`` and turn them into 3071 auto-generated entries in ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` in addition to its 3072 default contents. 3073 3074 When you use this variable, it is best to use it as follows: 3075 :: 3076 3077 IMAGE_INSTALL_append = " package-name" 3078 3079 Be sure to include the space 3080 between the quotation character and the start of the package name or 3081 names. 3082 3083 .. note:: 3084 3085 - When working with a 3086 :ref:`core-image-minimal-initramfs <ref-manual/images:images>` 3087 image, do not use the ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` variable to specify 3088 packages for installation. Instead, use the 3089 :term:`PACKAGE_INSTALL` variable, which 3090 allows the initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) recipe to use a 3091 fixed set of packages and not be affected by ``IMAGE_INSTALL``. 3092 For information on creating an initramfs, see the 3093 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" 3094 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 3095 3096 - Using ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` with the 3097 :ref:`+= <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:appending (+=) and prepending (=+) with spaces>` 3098 BitBake operator within the ``/conf/local.conf`` file or from 3099 within an image recipe is not recommended. Use of this operator 3100 in these ways can cause ordering issues. Since 3101 ``core-image.bbclass`` sets ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` to a default 3102 value using the 3103 :ref:`?= <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:setting a default value (?=)>` 3104 operator, using a ``+=`` operation against ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` 3105 results in unexpected behavior when used within 3106 ``conf/local.conf``. Furthermore, the same operation from 3107 within an image recipe may or may not succeed depending on the 3108 specific situation. In both these cases, the behavior is 3109 contrary to how most users expect the ``+=`` operator to work. 3110 3111 :term:`IMAGE_LINGUAS` 3112 Specifies the list of locales to install into the image during the 3113 root filesystem construction process. The OpenEmbedded build system 3114 automatically splits locale files, which are used for localization, 3115 into separate packages. Setting the ``IMAGE_LINGUAS`` variable 3116 ensures that any locale packages that correspond to packages already 3117 selected for installation into the image are also installed. Here is 3118 an example: 3119 :: 3120 3121 IMAGE_LINGUAS = "pt-br de-de" 3122 3123 In this example, the build system ensures any Brazilian Portuguese 3124 and German locale files that correspond to packages in the image are 3125 installed (i.e. ``*-locale-pt-br`` and ``*-locale-de-de`` as well as 3126 ``*-locale-pt`` and ``*-locale-de``, since some software packages 3127 only provide locale files by language and not by country-specific 3128 language). 3129 3130 See the :term:`GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES` 3131 variable for information on generating GLIBC locales. 3132 3133 3134 :term:`IMAGE_LINK_NAME` 3135 The name of the output image symlink (which does not include 3136 the version part as :term:`IMAGE_NAME` does). The default value 3137 is derived using the :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME` and :term:`MACHINE` 3138 variables: 3139 :: 3140 3141 IMAGE_LINK_NAME ?= "${IMAGE_BASENAME}-${MACHINE}" 3142 3143 3144 :term:`IMAGE_MANIFEST` 3145 The manifest file for the image. This file lists all the installed 3146 packages that make up the image. The file contains package 3147 information on a line-per-package basis as follows: 3148 :: 3149 3150 packagename packagearch version 3151 3152 The :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` class defines the manifest 3153 file as follows: 3154 :: 3155 3156 IMAGE_MANIFEST ="${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/${IMAGE_NAME}.rootfs.manifest" 3157 3158 The location is 3159 derived using the :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE` 3160 and :term:`IMAGE_NAME` variables. You can find 3161 information on how the image is created in the ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:image generation`" 3162 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 3163 3164 :term:`IMAGE_NAME` 3165 The name of the output image files minus the extension. This variable 3166 is derived using the :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME`, 3167 :term:`MACHINE`, and :term:`IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX` 3168 variables: 3169 :: 3170 3171 IMAGE_NAME ?= "${IMAGE_BASENAME}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" 3172 3173 :term:`IMAGE_NAME_SUFFIX` 3174 Suffix used for the image output file name - defaults to ``".rootfs"`` 3175 to distinguish the image file from other files created during image 3176 building; however if this suffix is redundant or not desired you can 3177 clear the value of this variable (set the value to ""). For example, 3178 this is typically cleared in initramfs image recipes. 3179 3180 :term:`IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR` 3181 Defines a multiplier that the build system applies to the initial 3182 image size for cases when the multiplier times the returned disk 3183 usage value for the image is greater than the sum of 3184 ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE`` and ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE``. The result of 3185 the multiplier applied to the initial image size creates free disk 3186 space in the image as overhead. By default, the build process uses a 3187 multiplier of 1.3 for this variable. This default value results in 3188 30% free disk space added to the image when this method is used to 3189 determine the final generated image size. You should be aware that 3190 post install scripts and the package management system uses disk 3191 space inside this overhead area. Consequently, the multiplier does 3192 not produce an image with all the theoretical free disk space. See 3193 ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE`` for information on how the build system 3194 determines the overall image size. 3195 3196 The default 30% free disk space typically gives the image enough room 3197 to boot and allows for basic post installs while still leaving a 3198 small amount of free disk space. If 30% free space is inadequate, you 3199 can increase the default value. For example, the following setting 3200 gives you 50% free space added to the image: 3201 :: 3202 3203 IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR = "1.5" 3204 3205 Alternatively, you can ensure a specific amount of free disk space is 3206 added to the image by using the ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE`` 3207 variable. 3208 3209 :term:`IMAGE_PKGTYPE` 3210 Defines the package type (i.e. DEB, RPM, IPK, or TAR) used by the 3211 OpenEmbedded build system. The variable is defined appropriately by 3212 the :ref:`package_deb <ref-classes-package_deb>`, 3213 :ref:`package_rpm <ref-classes-package_rpm>`, 3214 :ref:`package_ipk <ref-classes-package_ipk>`, or 3215 :ref:`package_tar <ref-classes-package_tar>` class. 3216 3217 .. note:: 3218 3219 The ``package_tar`` class is broken and is not supported. It is 3220 recommended that you do not use it. 3221 3222 The :ref:`populate_sdk_* <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` and 3223 :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` classes use the ``IMAGE_PKGTYPE`` 3224 for packaging up images and SDKs. 3225 3226 You should not set the ``IMAGE_PKGTYPE`` manually. Rather, the 3227 variable is set indirectly through the appropriate 3228 :ref:`package_* <ref-classes-package>` class using the 3229 :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` variable. The 3230 OpenEmbedded build system uses the first package type (e.g. DEB, RPM, 3231 or IPK) that appears with the variable 3232 3233 .. note:: 3234 3235 Files using the ``.tar`` format are never used as a substitute 3236 packaging format for DEB, RPM, and IPK formatted files for your image 3237 or SDK. 3238 3239 :term:`IMAGE_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND` 3240 Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build 3241 system creates the final image output files. You can specify 3242 functions separated by semicolons: 3243 :: 3244 3245 IMAGE_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... " 3246 3247 If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within the 3248 function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the 3249 directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the 3250 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more 3251 information. 3252 3253 :term:`IMAGE_PREPROCESS_COMMAND` 3254 Specifies a list of functions to call before the OpenEmbedded build 3255 system creates the final image output files. You can specify 3256 functions separated by semicolons: 3257 :: 3258 3259 IMAGE_PREPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... " 3260 3261 If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within the 3262 function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the 3263 directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the 3264 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more 3265 information. 3266 3267 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` 3268 The location of the root filesystem while it is under construction 3269 (i.e. during the :ref:`ref-tasks-rootfs` task). This 3270 variable is not configurable. Do not change it. 3271 3272 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_ALIGNMENT` 3273 Specifies the alignment for the output image file in Kbytes. If the 3274 size of the image is not a multiple of this value, then the size is 3275 rounded up to the nearest multiple of the value. The default value is 3276 "1". See :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE` for 3277 additional information. 3278 3279 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE` 3280 Defines additional free disk space created in the image in Kbytes. By 3281 default, this variable is set to "0". This free disk space is added 3282 to the image after the build system determines the image size as 3283 described in ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE``. 3284 3285 This variable is particularly useful when you want to ensure that a 3286 specific amount of free disk space is available on a device after an 3287 image is installed and running. For example, to be sure 5 Gbytes of 3288 free disk space is available, set the variable as follows: 3289 :: 3290 3291 IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE = "5242880" 3292 3293 For example, the Yocto Project Build Appliance specifically requests 3294 40 Gbytes of extra space with the line: 3295 :: 3296 3297 IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE = "41943040" 3298 3299 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE` 3300 Defines the size in Kbytes for the generated image. The OpenEmbedded 3301 build system determines the final size for the generated image using 3302 an algorithm that takes into account the initial disk space used for 3303 the generated image, a requested size for the image, and requested 3304 additional free disk space to be added to the image. Programatically, 3305 the build system determines the final size of the generated image as 3306 follows: 3307 :: 3308 3309 if (image-du * overhead) < rootfs-size: 3310 internal-rootfs-size = rootfs-size + xspace 3311 else: 3312 internal-rootfs-size = (image-du * overhead) + xspace 3313 where: 3314 image-du = Returned value of the du command on the image. 3315 overhead = IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR 3316 rootfs-size = IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE 3317 internal-rootfs-size = Initial root filesystem size before any modifications. 3318 xspace = IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE 3319 3320 See the :term:`IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR` 3321 and :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE` 3322 variables for related information. 3323 3324 :term:`IMAGE_TYPEDEP` 3325 Specifies a dependency from one image type on another. Here is an 3326 example from the :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class: 3327 :: 3328 3329 IMAGE_TYPEDEP_live = "ext3" 3330 3331 In the previous example, the variable ensures that when "live" is 3332 listed with the :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` variable, 3333 the OpenEmbedded build system produces an ``ext3`` image first since 3334 one of the components of the live image is an ``ext3`` formatted 3335 partition containing the root filesystem. 3336 3337 :term:`IMAGE_TYPES` 3338 Specifies the complete list of supported image types by default: 3339 3340 - btrfs 3341 - container 3342 - cpio 3343 - cpio.gz 3344 - cpio.lz4 3345 - cpio.lzma 3346 - cpio.xz 3347 - cramfs 3348 - ext2 3349 - ext2.bz2 3350 - ext2.gz 3351 - ext2.lzma 3352 - ext3 3353 - ext3.gz 3354 - ext4 3355 - ext4.gz 3356 - f2fs 3357 - hddimg 3358 - iso 3359 - jffs2 3360 - jffs2.sum 3361 - multiubi 3362 - squashfs 3363 - squashfs-lz4 3364 - squashfs-lzo 3365 - squashfs-xz 3366 - tar 3367 - tar.bz2 3368 - tar.gz 3369 - tar.lz4 3370 - tar.xz 3371 - tar.zst 3372 - ubi 3373 - ubifs 3374 - wic 3375 - wic.bz2 3376 - wic.gz 3377 - wic.lzma 3378 3379 For more information about these types of images, see 3380 ``meta/classes/image_types*.bbclass`` in the :term:`Source Directory`. 3381 3382 :term:`IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX` 3383 Version suffix that is part of the default :term:`IMAGE_NAME` and 3384 :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` values. 3385 Defaults to ``"-${DATETIME}"``, however you could set this to a 3386 version string that comes from your external build environment if 3387 desired, and this suffix would then be used consistently across 3388 the build artifacts. 3389 3390 :term:`INC_PR` 3391 Helps define the recipe revision for recipes that share a common 3392 ``include`` file. You can think of this variable as part of the 3393 recipe revision as set from within an include file. 3394 3395 Suppose, for example, you have a set of recipes that are used across 3396 several projects. And, within each of those recipes the revision (its 3397 :term:`PR` value) is set accordingly. In this case, when 3398 the revision of those recipes changes, the burden is on you to find 3399 all those recipes and be sure that they get changed to reflect the 3400 updated version of the recipe. In this scenario, it can get 3401 complicated when recipes that are used in many places and provide 3402 common functionality are upgraded to a new revision. 3403 3404 A more efficient way of dealing with this situation is to set the 3405 ``INC_PR`` variable inside the ``include`` files that the recipes 3406 share and then expand the ``INC_PR`` variable within the recipes to 3407 help define the recipe revision. 3408 3409 The following provides an example that shows how to use the 3410 ``INC_PR`` variable given a common ``include`` file that defines the 3411 variable. Once the variable is defined in the ``include`` file, you 3412 can use the variable to set the ``PR`` values in each recipe. You 3413 will notice that when you set a recipe's ``PR`` you can provide more 3414 granular revisioning by appending values to the ``INC_PR`` variable: 3415 :: 3416 3417 recipes-graphics/xorg-font/xorg-font-common.inc:INC_PR = "r2" 3418 recipes-graphics/xorg-font/encodings_1.0.4.bb:PR = "${INC_PR}.1" 3419 recipes-graphics/xorg-font/font-util_1.3.0.bb:PR = "${INC_PR}.0" 3420 recipes-graphics/xorg-font/font-alias_1.0.3.bb:PR = "${INC_PR}.3" 3421 3422 The 3423 first line of the example establishes the baseline revision to be 3424 used for all recipes that use the ``include`` file. The remaining 3425 lines in the example are from individual recipes and show how the 3426 ``PR`` value is set. 3427 3428 :term:`INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE` 3429 Specifies a space-separated list of license names (as they would 3430 appear in :term:`LICENSE`) that should be excluded 3431 from the build. Recipes that provide no alternatives to listed 3432 incompatible licenses are not built. Packages that are individually 3433 licensed with the specified incompatible licenses will be deleted. 3434 3435 .. note:: 3436 3437 This functionality is only regularly tested using the following 3438 setting: 3439 :: 3440 3441 INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE = "GPL-3.0 LGPL-3.0 AGPL-3.0" 3442 3443 3444 Although you can use other settings, you might be required to 3445 remove dependencies on or provide alternatives to components that 3446 are required to produce a functional system image. 3447 3448 .. note:: 3449 3450 It is possible to define a list of licenses that are allowed to be 3451 used instead of the licenses that are excluded. To do this, define 3452 a variable ``COMPATIBLE_LICENSES`` with the names of the licences 3453 that are allowed. Then define ``INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE`` as: 3454 :: 3455 3456 INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE = "${@' '.join(sorted(set(d.getVar('AVAILABLE_LICENSES').split()) - set(d.getVar('COMPATIBLE_LICENSES').split())))}" 3457 3458 3459 This will result in ``INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE`` containing the names of 3460 all licences from :term:`AVAILABLE_LICENSES` except the ones specified 3461 in ``COMPATIBLE_LICENSES`` , thus only allowing the latter licences to 3462 be used. 3463 3464 :term:`INHERIT` 3465 Causes the named class or classes to be inherited globally. Anonymous 3466 functions in the class or classes are not executed for the base 3467 configuration and in each individual recipe. The OpenEmbedded build 3468 system ignores changes to ``INHERIT`` in individual recipes. 3469 3470 For more information on ``INHERIT``, see the 3471 :ref:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:\`\`inherit\`\` configuration directive`" 3472 section in the Bitbake User Manual. 3473 3474 :term:`INHERIT_DISTRO` 3475 Lists classes that will be inherited at the distribution level. It is 3476 unlikely that you want to edit this variable. 3477 3478 The default value of the variable is set as follows in the 3479 ``meta/conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf`` file: 3480 :: 3481 3482 INHERIT_DISTRO ?= "debian devshell sstate license" 3483 3484 :term:`INHIBIT_DEFAULT_DEPS` 3485 Prevents the default dependencies, namely the C compiler and standard 3486 C library (libc), from being added to :term:`DEPENDS`. 3487 This variable is usually used within recipes that do not require any 3488 compilation using the C compiler. 3489 3490 Set the variable to "1" to prevent the default dependencies from 3491 being added. 3492 3493 :term:`INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT` 3494 Prevents the OpenEmbedded build system from splitting out debug 3495 information during packaging. By default, the build system splits out 3496 debugging information during the 3497 :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task. For more information on 3498 how debug information is split out, see the 3499 :term:`PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE` 3500 variable. 3501 3502 To prevent the build system from splitting out debug information 3503 during packaging, set the ``INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT`` variable as 3504 follows: 3505 :: 3506 3507 INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT = "1" 3508 3509 :term:`INHIBIT_PACKAGE_STRIP` 3510 If set to "1", causes the build to not strip binaries in resulting 3511 packages and prevents the ``-dbg`` package from containing the source 3512 files. 3513 3514 By default, the OpenEmbedded build system strips binaries and puts 3515 the debugging symbols into ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}-dbg``. 3516 Consequently, you should not set ``INHIBIT_PACKAGE_STRIP`` when you 3517 plan to debug in general. 3518 3519 :term:`INHIBIT_SYSROOT_STRIP` 3520 If set to "1", causes the build to not strip binaries in the 3521 resulting sysroot. 3522 3523 By default, the OpenEmbedded build system strips binaries in the 3524 resulting sysroot. When you specifically set the 3525 ``INHIBIT_SYSROOT_STRIP`` variable to "1" in your recipe, you inhibit 3526 this stripping. 3527 3528 If you want to use this variable, include the 3529 :ref:`staging <ref-classes-staging>` class. This class uses a 3530 ``sys_strip()`` function to test for the variable and acts 3531 accordingly. 3532 3533 .. note:: 3534 3535 Use of the ``INHIBIT_SYSROOT_STRIP`` variable occurs in rare and 3536 special circumstances. For example, suppose you are building 3537 bare-metal firmware by using an external GCC toolchain. Furthermore, 3538 even if the toolchain's binaries are strippable, other files exist 3539 that are needed for the build that are not strippable. 3540 3541 :term:`INITRAMFS_FSTYPES` 3542 Defines the format for the output image of an initial RAM filesystem 3543 (initramfs), which is used during boot. Supported formats are the 3544 same as those supported by the 3545 :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` variable. 3546 3547 The default value of this variable, which is set in the 3548 ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file in the 3549 :term:`Source Directory`, is "cpio.gz". The Linux kernel's 3550 initramfs mechanism, as opposed to the initial RAM filesystem 3551 `initrd <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Initrd>`__ mechanism, expects 3552 an optionally compressed cpio archive. 3553 3554 :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE` 3555 Specifies the :term:`PROVIDES` name of an image 3556 recipe that is used to build an initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) 3557 image. In other words, the ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` variable causes an 3558 additional recipe to be built as a dependency to whatever root 3559 filesystem recipe you might be using (e.g. ``core-image-sato``). The 3560 initramfs image recipe you provide should set 3561 :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` to 3562 :term:`INITRAMFS_FSTYPES`. 3563 3564 An initramfs image provides a temporary root filesystem used for 3565 early system initialization (e.g. loading of modules needed to locate 3566 and mount the "real" root filesystem). 3567 3568 .. note:: 3569 3570 See the ``meta/recipes-core/images/core-image-minimal-initramfs.bb`` 3571 recipe in the :term:`Source Directory` 3572 for an example initramfs recipe. To select this sample recipe as 3573 the one built to provide the initramfs image, set ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` 3574 to "core-image-minimal-initramfs". 3575 3576 You can also find more information by referencing the 3577 ``meta-poky/conf/local.conf.sample.extended`` configuration file in 3578 the Source Directory, the :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` class, 3579 and the :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class to see how to use 3580 the ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` variable. 3581 3582 If ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` is empty, which is the default, then no 3583 initramfs image is built. 3584 3585 For more information, you can also see the 3586 :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE` 3587 variable, which allows the generated image to be bundled inside the 3588 kernel image. Additionally, for information on creating an initramfs 3589 image, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section 3590 in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 3591 3592 :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE` 3593 Controls whether or not the image recipe specified by 3594 :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE` is run through an 3595 extra pass 3596 (:ref:`ref-tasks-bundle_initramfs`) during 3597 kernel compilation in order to build a single binary that contains 3598 both the kernel image and the initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) 3599 image. This makes use of the 3600 :term:`CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE` kernel 3601 feature. 3602 3603 .. note:: 3604 3605 Using an extra compilation pass to bundle the initramfs avoids a 3606 circular dependency between the kernel recipe and the initramfs 3607 recipe should the initramfs include kernel modules. Should that be 3608 the case, the initramfs recipe depends on the kernel for the 3609 kernel modules, and the kernel depends on the initramfs recipe 3610 since the initramfs is bundled inside the kernel image. 3611 3612 The combined binary is deposited into the ``tmp/deploy`` directory, 3613 which is part of the :term:`Build Directory`. 3614 3615 Setting the variable to "1" in a configuration file causes the 3616 OpenEmbedded build system to generate a kernel image with the 3617 initramfs specified in ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` bundled within: 3618 :: 3619 3620 INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE = "1" 3621 3622 By default, the 3623 :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class sets this variable to a 3624 null string as follows: 3625 :: 3626 3627 INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE ?= "" 3628 3629 .. note:: 3630 3631 You must set the ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE`` variable in a 3632 configuration file. You cannot set the variable in a recipe file. 3633 3634 See the 3635 :yocto_git:`local.conf.sample.extended </poky/tree/meta-poky/conf/local.conf.sample.extended>` 3636 file for additional information. Also, for information on creating an 3637 initramfs, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section 3638 in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 3639 3640 :term:`INITRAMFS_LINK_NAME` 3641 The link name of the initial RAM filesystem image. This variable is 3642 set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as 3643 follows: 3644 :: 3645 3646 INITRAMFS_LINK_NAME ?= "initramfs-${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}" 3647 3648 The value of the 3649 ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the same 3650 file, has the following value: 3651 :: 3652 3653 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}" 3654 3655 See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional 3656 information. 3657 3658 :term:`INITRAMFS_NAME` 3659 The base name of the initial RAM filesystem image. This variable is 3660 set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as 3661 follows: 3662 :: 3663 3664 INITRAMFS_NAME ?= "initramfs-${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}" 3665 3666 The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` 3667 variable, which is set in the same file, has the following value: 3668 :: 3669 3670 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" 3671 3672 :term:`INITRD` 3673 Indicates list of filesystem images to concatenate and use as an 3674 initial RAM disk (``initrd``). 3675 3676 The ``INITRD`` variable is an optional variable used with the 3677 :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class. 3678 3679 :term:`INITRD_IMAGE` 3680 When building a "live" bootable image (i.e. when 3681 :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` contains "live"), 3682 ``INITRD_IMAGE`` specifies the image recipe that should be built to 3683 provide the initial RAM disk image. The default value is 3684 "core-image-minimal-initramfs". 3685 3686 See the :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class for more 3687 information. 3688 3689 :term:`INITSCRIPT_NAME` 3690 The filename of the initialization script as installed to 3691 ``${sysconfdir}/init.d``. 3692 3693 This variable is used in recipes when using ``update-rc.d.bbclass``. 3694 The variable is mandatory. 3695 3696 :term:`INITSCRIPT_PACKAGES` 3697 A list of the packages that contain initscripts. If multiple packages 3698 are specified, you need to append the package name to the other 3699 ``INITSCRIPT_*`` as an override. 3700 3701 This variable is used in recipes when using ``update-rc.d.bbclass``. 3702 The variable is optional and defaults to the :term:`PN` 3703 variable. 3704 3705 :term:`INITSCRIPT_PARAMS` 3706 Specifies the options to pass to ``update-rc.d``. Here is an example: 3707 :: 3708 3709 INITSCRIPT_PARAMS = "start 99 5 2 . stop 20 0 1 6 ." 3710 3711 In this example, the script has a runlevel of 99, starts the script 3712 in initlevels 2 and 5, and stops the script in levels 0, 1 and 6. 3713 3714 The variable's default value is "defaults", which is set in the 3715 :ref:`update-rc.d <ref-classes-update-rc.d>` class. 3716 3717 The value in ``INITSCRIPT_PARAMS`` is passed through to the 3718 ``update-rc.d`` command. For more information on valid parameters, 3719 please see the ``update-rc.d`` manual page at 3720 https://manpages.debian.org/buster/init-system-helpers/update-rc.d.8.en.html 3721 3722 :term:`INSANE_SKIP` 3723 Specifies the QA checks to skip for a specific package within a 3724 recipe. For example, to skip the check for symbolic link ``.so`` 3725 files in the main package of a recipe, add the following to the 3726 recipe. The package name override must be used, which in this example 3727 is ``${PN}``: 3728 :: 3729 3730 INSANE_SKIP_${PN} += "dev-so" 3731 3732 See the ":ref:`insane.bbclass <ref-classes-insane>`" section for a 3733 list of the valid QA checks you can specify using this variable. 3734 3735 :term:`INSTALL_TIMEZONE_FILE` 3736 By default, the ``tzdata`` recipe packages an ``/etc/timezone`` file. 3737 Set the ``INSTALL_TIMEZONE_FILE`` variable to "0" at the 3738 configuration level to disable this behavior. 3739 3740 :term:`IPK_FEED_URIS` 3741 When the IPK backend is in use and package management is enabled on 3742 the target, you can use this variable to set up ``opkg`` in the 3743 target image to point to package feeds on a nominated server. Once 3744 the feed is established, you can perform installations or upgrades 3745 using the package manager at runtime. 3746 3747 :term:`KARCH` 3748 Defines the kernel architecture used when assembling the 3749 configuration. Architectures supported for this release are: 3750 3751 - powerpc 3752 - i386 3753 - x86_64 3754 - arm 3755 - qemu 3756 - mips 3757 3758 You define the ``KARCH`` variable in the :ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:bsp descriptions`. 3759 3760 :term:`KBRANCH` 3761 A regular expression used by the build process to explicitly identify 3762 the kernel branch that is validated, patched, and configured during a 3763 build. You must set this variable to ensure the exact kernel branch 3764 you want is being used by the build process. 3765 3766 Values for this variable are set in the kernel's recipe file and the 3767 kernel's append file. For example, if you are using the 3768 ``linux-yocto_4.12`` kernel, the kernel recipe file is the 3769 ``meta/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_4.12.bb`` file. ``KBRANCH`` 3770 is set as follows in that kernel recipe file: 3771 :: 3772 3773 KBRANCH ?= "standard/base" 3774 3775 This variable is also used from the kernel's append file to identify 3776 the kernel branch specific to a particular machine or target 3777 hardware. Continuing with the previous kernel example, the kernel's 3778 append file (i.e. ``linux-yocto_4.12.bbappend``) is located in the 3779 BSP layer for a given machine. For example, the append file for the 3780 Beaglebone, EdgeRouter, and generic versions of both 32 and 64-bit IA 3781 machines (``meta-yocto-bsp``) is named 3782 ``meta-yocto-bsp/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_4.12.bbappend``. 3783 Here are the related statements from that append file: 3784 :: 3785 3786 KBRANCH_genericx86 = "standard/base" 3787 KBRANCH_genericx86-64 = "standard/base" 3788 KBRANCH_edgerouter = "standard/edgerouter" 3789 KBRANCH_beaglebone = "standard/beaglebone" 3790 3791 The ``KBRANCH`` statements 3792 identify the kernel branch to use when building for each supported 3793 BSP. 3794 3795 :term:`KBUILD_DEFCONFIG` 3796 When used with the :ref:`kernel-yocto <ref-classes-kernel-yocto>` 3797 class, specifies an "in-tree" kernel configuration file for use 3798 during a kernel build. 3799 3800 Typically, when using a ``defconfig`` to configure a kernel during a 3801 build, you place the file in your layer in the same manner as you 3802 would place patch files and configuration fragment files (i.e. 3803 "out-of-tree"). However, if you want to use a ``defconfig`` file that 3804 is part of the kernel tree (i.e. "in-tree"), you can use the 3805 ``KBUILD_DEFCONFIG`` variable and append the 3806 :term:`KMACHINE` variable to point to the 3807 ``defconfig`` file. 3808 3809 To use the variable, set it in the append file for your kernel recipe 3810 using the following form: 3811 :: 3812 3813 KBUILD_DEFCONFIG_KMACHINE ?= defconfig_file 3814 3815 Here is an example from a "raspberrypi2" ``KMACHINE`` build that uses 3816 a ``defconfig`` file named "bcm2709_defconfig": 3817 :: 3818 3819 KBUILD_DEFCONFIG_raspberrypi2 = "bcm2709_defconfig" 3820 3821 As an alternative, you can use the following within your append file: 3822 :: 3823 3824 KBUILD_DEFCONFIG_pn-linux-yocto ?= defconfig_file 3825 3826 For more 3827 information on how to use the ``KBUILD_DEFCONFIG`` variable, see the 3828 ":ref:`kernel-dev/common:using an "in-tree" \`\`defconfig\`\` file`" 3829 section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual. 3830 3831 :term:`KERNEL_ALT_IMAGETYPE` 3832 Specifies an alternate kernel image type for creation in addition to 3833 the kernel image type specified using the 3834 :term:`KERNEL_IMAGETYPE` variable. 3835 3836 :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` 3837 Specifies the name of all of the build artifacts. You can change the 3838 name of the artifacts by changing the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME`` 3839 variable. 3840 3841 The value of ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME``, which is set in the 3842 ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file, has the 3843 following default value: 3844 :: 3845 3846 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" 3847 3848 See the :term:`PKGE`, :term:`PKGV`, :term:`PKGR`, :term:`MACHINE` 3849 and :term:`IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX` variables for additional information. 3850 3851 :term:`KERNEL_CLASSES` 3852 A list of classes defining kernel image types that the 3853 :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class should inherit. You 3854 typically append this variable to enable extended image types. An 3855 example is the "kernel-fitimage", which enables fitImage support and 3856 resides in ``meta/classes/kernel-fitimage.bbclass``. You can register 3857 custom kernel image types with the ``kernel`` class using this 3858 variable. 3859 3860 :term:`KERNEL_DEVICETREE` 3861 Specifies the name of the generated Linux kernel device tree (i.e. 3862 the ``.dtb``) file. 3863 3864 .. note:: 3865 3866 Legacy support exists for specifying the full path to the device 3867 tree. However, providing just the ``.dtb`` file is preferred. 3868 3869 In order to use this variable, the 3870 :ref:`kernel-devicetree <ref-classes-kernel-devicetree>` class must 3871 be inherited. 3872 3873 :term:`KERNEL_DTB_LINK_NAME` 3874 The link name of the kernel device tree binary (DTB). This variable 3875 is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as 3876 follows: 3877 :: 3878 3879 KERNEL_DTB_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}" 3880 3881 The 3882 value of the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in 3883 the same file, has the following value: 3884 :: 3885 3886 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}" 3887 3888 See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional 3889 information. 3890 3891 :term:`KERNEL_DTB_NAME` 3892 The base name of the kernel device tree binary (DTB). This variable 3893 is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as 3894 follows: 3895 :: 3896 3897 KERNEL_DTB_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}" 3898 3899 The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` 3900 variable, which is set in the same file, has the following value: 3901 :: 3902 3903 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" 3904 3905 :term:`KERNEL_DTC_FLAGS` 3906 Specifies the ``dtc`` flags that are passed to the Linux kernel build 3907 system when generating the device trees (via ``DTC_FLAGS`` environment 3908 variable). 3909 3910 In order to use this variable, the 3911 :ref:`kernel-devicetree <ref-classes-kernel-devicetree>` class must 3912 be inherited. 3913 3914 :term:`KERNEL_EXTRA_ARGS` 3915 Specifies additional ``make`` command-line arguments the OpenEmbedded 3916 build system passes on when compiling the kernel. 3917 3918 :term:`KERNEL_FEATURES` 3919 Includes additional kernel metadata. In the OpenEmbedded build 3920 system, the default Board Support Packages (BSPs) 3921 :term:`Metadata` is provided through the 3922 :term:`KMACHINE` and :term:`KBRANCH` 3923 variables. You can use the ``KERNEL_FEATURES`` variable from within 3924 the kernel recipe or kernel append file to further add metadata for 3925 all BSPs or specific BSPs. 3926 3927 The metadata you add through this variable includes config fragments 3928 and features descriptions, which usually includes patches as well as 3929 config fragments. You typically override the ``KERNEL_FEATURES`` 3930 variable for a specific machine. In this way, you can provide 3931 validated, but optional, sets of kernel configurations and features. 3932 3933 For example, the following example from the ``linux-yocto-rt_4.12`` 3934 kernel recipe adds "netfilter" and "taskstats" features to all BSPs 3935 as well as "virtio" configurations to all QEMU machines. The last two 3936 statements add specific configurations to targeted machine types: 3937 :: 3938 3939 KERNEL_EXTRA_FEATURES ?= "features/netfilter/netfilter.scc features/taskstats/taskstats.scc" 3940 KERNEL_FEATURES_append = "${KERNEL_EXTRA_FEATURES}" 3941 KERNEL_FEATURES_append_qemuall = "cfg/virtio.scc" 3942 KERNEL_FEATURES_append_qemux86 = " cfg/sound.scc cfg/paravirt_kvm.scc" 3943 KERNEL_FEATURES_append_qemux86-64 = "cfg/sound.scc" 3944 3945 :term:`KERNEL_FIT_LINK_NAME` 3946 The link name of the kernel flattened image tree (FIT) image. This 3947 variable is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` 3948 file as follows: 3949 :: 3950 3951 KERNEL_FIT_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}" 3952 3953 The value of the 3954 ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the same 3955 file, has the following value: 3956 :: 3957 3958 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}" 3959 3960 See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional 3961 information. 3962 3963 :term:`KERNEL_FIT_NAME` 3964 The base name of the kernel flattened image tree (FIT) image. This 3965 variable is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` 3966 file as follows: 3967 :: 3968 3969 KERNEL_FIT_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}" 3970 3971 The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` 3972 variable, which is set in the same file, has the following value: 3973 :: 3974 3975 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" 3976 3977 :term:`KERNEL_IMAGE_LINK_NAME` 3978 The link name for the kernel image. This variable is set in the 3979 ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows: 3980 :: 3981 3982 KERNEL_IMAGE_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}" 3983 3984 The value of 3985 the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the same 3986 file, has the following value: 3987 :: 3988 3989 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}" 3990 3991 See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional 3992 information. 3993 3994 :term:`KERNEL_IMAGE_MAXSIZE` 3995 Specifies the maximum size of the kernel image file in kilobytes. If 3996 ``KERNEL_IMAGE_MAXSIZE`` is set, the size of the kernel image file is 3997 checked against the set value during the 3998 :ref:`ref-tasks-sizecheck` task. The task fails if 3999 the kernel image file is larger than the setting. 4000 4001 ``KERNEL_IMAGE_MAXSIZE`` is useful for target devices that have a 4002 limited amount of space in which the kernel image must be stored. 4003 4004 By default, this variable is not set, which means the size of the 4005 kernel image is not checked. 4006 4007 :term:`KERNEL_IMAGE_NAME` 4008 The base name of the kernel image. This variable is set in the 4009 ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows: 4010 :: 4011 4012 KERNEL_IMAGE_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}" 4013 4014 The value of the 4015 :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` variable, 4016 which is set in the same file, has the following value: 4017 :: 4018 4019 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" 4020 4021 :term:`KERNEL_IMAGETYPE` 4022 The type of kernel to build for a device, usually set by the machine 4023 configuration files and defaults to "zImage". This variable is used 4024 when building the kernel and is passed to ``make`` as the target to 4025 build. 4026 4027 If you want to build an alternate kernel image type in addition to that 4028 specified by ``KERNEL_IMAGETYPE``, use the :term:`KERNEL_ALT_IMAGETYPE` 4029 variable. 4030 4031 :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD` 4032 Lists kernel modules that need to be auto-loaded during boot. 4033 4034 .. note:: 4035 4036 This variable replaces the deprecated :term:`module_autoload` 4037 variable. 4038 4039 You can use the ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD`` variable anywhere that it 4040 can be recognized by the kernel recipe or by an out-of-tree kernel 4041 module recipe (e.g. a machine configuration file, a distribution 4042 configuration file, an append file for the recipe, or the recipe 4043 itself). 4044 4045 Specify it as follows: 4046 :: 4047 4048 KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD += "module_name1 module_name2 module_name3" 4049 4050 Including ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD`` causes the OpenEmbedded build 4051 system to populate the ``/etc/modules-load.d/modname.conf`` file with 4052 the list of modules to be auto-loaded on boot. The modules appear 4053 one-per-line in the file. Here is an example of the most common use 4054 case: 4055 :: 4056 4057 KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD += "module_name" 4058 4059 For information on how to populate the ``modname.conf`` file with 4060 ``modprobe.d`` syntax lines, see the :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_PROBECONF` variable. 4061 4062 :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_PROBECONF` 4063 Provides a list of modules for which the OpenEmbedded build system 4064 expects to find ``module_conf_``\ modname values that specify 4065 configuration for each of the modules. For information on how to 4066 provide those module configurations, see the 4067 :term:`module_conf_* <module_conf>` variable. 4068 4069 :term:`KERNEL_PATH` 4070 The location of the kernel sources. This variable is set to the value 4071 of the :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_DIR` within 4072 the :ref:`module <ref-classes-module>` class. For information on 4073 how this variable is used, see the 4074 ":ref:`kernel-dev/common:incorporating out-of-tree modules`" 4075 section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual. 4076 4077 To help maximize compatibility with out-of-tree drivers used to build 4078 modules, the OpenEmbedded build system also recognizes and uses the 4079 :term:`KERNEL_SRC` variable, which is identical to 4080 the ``KERNEL_PATH`` variable. Both variables are common variables 4081 used by external Makefiles to point to the kernel source directory. 4082 4083 :term:`KERNEL_SRC` 4084 The location of the kernel sources. This variable is set to the value 4085 of the :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_DIR` within 4086 the :ref:`module <ref-classes-module>` class. For information on 4087 how this variable is used, see the 4088 ":ref:`kernel-dev/common:incorporating out-of-tree modules`" 4089 section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual. 4090 4091 To help maximize compatibility with out-of-tree drivers used to build 4092 modules, the OpenEmbedded build system also recognizes and uses the 4093 :term:`KERNEL_PATH` variable, which is identical 4094 to the ``KERNEL_SRC`` variable. Both variables are common variables 4095 used by external Makefiles to point to the kernel source directory. 4096 4097 :term:`KERNEL_VERSION` 4098 Specifies the version of the kernel as extracted from ``version.h`` 4099 or ``utsrelease.h`` within the kernel sources. Effects of setting 4100 this variable do not take affect until the kernel has been 4101 configured. Consequently, attempting to refer to this variable in 4102 contexts prior to configuration will not work. 4103 4104 :term:`KERNELDEPMODDEPEND` 4105 Specifies whether the data referenced through 4106 :term:`PKGDATA_DIR` is needed or not. The 4107 ``KERNELDEPMODDEPEND`` does not control whether or not that data 4108 exists, but simply whether or not it is used. If you do not need to 4109 use the data, set the ``KERNELDEPMODDEPEND`` variable in your 4110 ``initramfs`` recipe. Setting the variable there when the data is not 4111 needed avoids a potential dependency loop. 4112 4113 :term:`KFEATURE_DESCRIPTION` 4114 Provides a short description of a configuration fragment. You use 4115 this variable in the ``.scc`` file that describes a configuration 4116 fragment file. Here is the variable used in a file named ``smp.scc`` 4117 to describe SMP being enabled: 4118 :: 4119 4120 define KFEATURE_DESCRIPTION "Enable SMP" 4121 4122 :term:`KMACHINE` 4123 The machine as known by the kernel. Sometimes the machine name used 4124 by the kernel does not match the machine name used by the 4125 OpenEmbedded build system. For example, the machine name that the 4126 OpenEmbedded build system understands as ``core2-32-intel-common`` 4127 goes by a different name in the Linux Yocto kernel. The kernel 4128 understands that machine as ``intel-core2-32``. For cases like these, 4129 the ``KMACHINE`` variable maps the kernel machine name to the 4130 OpenEmbedded build system machine name. 4131 4132 These mappings between different names occur in the Yocto Linux 4133 Kernel's ``meta`` branch. As an example take a look in the 4134 ``common/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_3.19.bbappend`` file: 4135 :: 4136 4137 LINUX_VERSION_core2-32-intel-common = "3.19.0" 4138 COMPATIBLE_MACHINE_core2-32-intel-common = "${MACHINE}" 4139 SRCREV_meta_core2-32-intel-common = "8897ef68b30e7426bc1d39895e71fb155d694974" 4140 SRCREV_machine_core2-32-intel-common = "43b9eced9ba8a57add36af07736344dcc383f711" 4141 KMACHINE_core2-32-intel-common = "intel-core2-32" 4142 KBRANCH_core2-32-intel-common = "standard/base" 4143 KERNEL_FEATURES_append_core2-32-intel-common = "${KERNEL_FEATURES_INTEL_COMMON}" 4144 4145 The ``KMACHINE`` statement says 4146 that the kernel understands the machine name as "intel-core2-32". 4147 However, the OpenEmbedded build system understands the machine as 4148 "core2-32-intel-common". 4149 4150 :term:`KTYPE` 4151 Defines the kernel type to be used in assembling the configuration. 4152 The linux-yocto recipes define "standard", "tiny", and "preempt-rt" 4153 kernel types. See the ":ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:kernel types`" 4154 section in the 4155 Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual for more information on 4156 kernel types. 4157 4158 You define the ``KTYPE`` variable in the 4159 :ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:bsp descriptions`. The 4160 value you use must match the value used for the 4161 :term:`LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE` value used by the 4162 kernel recipe. 4163 4164 :term:`LABELS` 4165 Provides a list of targets for automatic configuration. 4166 4167 See the :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more 4168 information on how this variable is used. 4169 4170 :term:`LAYERDEPENDS` 4171 Lists the layers, separated by spaces, on which this recipe depends. 4172 Optionally, you can specify a specific layer version for a dependency 4173 by adding it to the end of the layer name. Here is an example: 4174 :: 4175 4176 LAYERDEPENDS_mylayer = "anotherlayer (=3)" 4177 4178 In this previous example, 4179 version 3 of "anotherlayer" is compared against 4180 :term:`LAYERVERSION`\ ``_anotherlayer``. 4181 4182 An error is produced if any dependency is missing or the version 4183 numbers (if specified) do not match exactly. This variable is used in 4184 the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be suffixed with the name of 4185 the specific layer (e.g. ``LAYERDEPENDS_mylayer``). 4186 4187 :term:`LAYERDIR` 4188 When used inside the ``layer.conf`` configuration file, this variable 4189 provides the path of the current layer. This variable is not 4190 available outside of ``layer.conf`` and references are expanded 4191 immediately when parsing of the file completes. 4192 4193 :term:`LAYERRECOMMENDS` 4194 Lists the layers, separated by spaces, recommended for use with this 4195 layer. 4196 4197 Optionally, you can specify a specific layer version for a 4198 recommendation by adding the version to the end of the layer name. 4199 Here is an example: 4200 :: 4201 4202 LAYERRECOMMENDS_mylayer = "anotherlayer (=3)" 4203 4204 In this previous example, version 3 of "anotherlayer" is compared 4205 against ``LAYERVERSION_anotherlayer``. 4206 4207 This variable is used in the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be 4208 suffixed with the name of the specific layer (e.g. 4209 ``LAYERRECOMMENDS_mylayer``). 4210 4211 :term:`LAYERSERIES_COMPAT` 4212 Lists the versions of the :term:`OpenEmbedded-Core (OE-Core)` for which 4213 a layer is compatible. Using the ``LAYERSERIES_COMPAT`` variable 4214 allows the layer maintainer to indicate which combinations of the 4215 layer and OE-Core can be expected to work. The variable gives the 4216 system a way to detect when a layer has not been tested with new 4217 releases of OE-Core (e.g. the layer is not maintained). 4218 4219 To specify the OE-Core versions for which a layer is compatible, use 4220 this variable in your layer's ``conf/layer.conf`` configuration file. 4221 For the list, use the Yocto Project 4222 :yocto_wiki:`Release Name </Releases>` (e.g. 4223 &DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP;). To specify multiple OE-Core versions for the 4224 layer, use a space-separated list: 4225 :: 4226 4227 LAYERSERIES_COMPAT_layer_root_name = "&DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP; &DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP_MINUS_ONE;" 4228 4229 .. note:: 4230 4231 Setting ``LAYERSERIES_COMPAT`` is required by the Yocto Project 4232 Compatible version 2 standard. 4233 The OpenEmbedded build system produces a warning if the variable 4234 is not set for any given layer. 4235 4236 See the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating your own layer`" 4237 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 4238 4239 :term:`LAYERVERSION` 4240 Optionally specifies the version of a layer as a single number. You 4241 can use this within :term:`LAYERDEPENDS` for 4242 another layer in order to depend on a specific version of the layer. 4243 This variable is used in the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be 4244 suffixed with the name of the specific layer (e.g. 4245 ``LAYERVERSION_mylayer``). 4246 4247 :term:`LD` 4248 The minimal command and arguments used to run the linker. 4249 4250 :term:`LDFLAGS` 4251 Specifies the flags to pass to the linker. This variable is exported 4252 to an environment variable and thus made visible to the software 4253 being built during the compilation step. 4254 4255 Default initialization for ``LDFLAGS`` varies depending on what is 4256 being built: 4257 4258 - :term:`TARGET_LDFLAGS` when building for the 4259 target 4260 4261 - :term:`BUILD_LDFLAGS` when building for the 4262 build host (i.e. ``-native``) 4263 4264 - :term:`BUILDSDK_LDFLAGS` when building for 4265 an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``) 4266 4267 :term:`LEAD_SONAME` 4268 Specifies the lead (or primary) compiled library file (i.e. ``.so``) 4269 that the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class applies its 4270 naming policy to given a recipe that packages multiple libraries. 4271 4272 This variable works in conjunction with the ``debian`` class. 4273 4274 :term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM` 4275 Checksums of the license text in the recipe source code. 4276 4277 This variable tracks changes in license text of the source code 4278 files. If the license text is changed, it will trigger a build 4279 failure, which gives the developer an opportunity to review any 4280 license change. 4281 4282 This variable must be defined for all recipes (unless 4283 :term:`LICENSE` is set to "CLOSED"). 4284 4285 For more information, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:tracking license changes`" 4286 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 4287 4288 :term:`LICENSE` 4289 The list of source licenses for the recipe. Follow these rules: 4290 4291 - Do not use spaces within individual license names. 4292 4293 - Separate license names using \| (pipe) when there is a choice 4294 between licenses. 4295 4296 - Separate license names using & (ampersand) when multiple licenses 4297 exist that cover different parts of the source. 4298 4299 - You can use spaces between license names. 4300 4301 - For standard licenses, use the names of the files in 4302 ``meta/files/common-licenses/`` or the 4303 :term:`SPDXLICENSEMAP` flag names defined in 4304 ``meta/conf/licenses.conf``. 4305 4306 Here are some examples: 4307 :: 4308 4309 LICENSE = "LGPLv2.1 | GPLv3" 4310 LICENSE = "MPL-1 & LGPLv2.1" 4311 LICENSE = "GPLv2+" 4312 4313 The first example is from the 4314 recipes for Qt, which the user may choose to distribute under either 4315 the LGPL version 2.1 or GPL version 3. The second example is from 4316 Cairo where two licenses cover different parts of the source code. 4317 The final example is from ``sysstat``, which presents a single 4318 license. 4319 4320 You can also specify licenses on a per-package basis to handle 4321 situations where components of the output have different licenses. 4322 For example, a piece of software whose code is licensed under GPLv2 4323 but has accompanying documentation licensed under the GNU Free 4324 Documentation License 1.2 could be specified as follows: 4325 :: 4326 4327 LICENSE = "GFDL-1.2 & GPLv2" 4328 LICENSE_${PN} = "GPLv2" 4329 LICENSE_${PN}-doc = "GFDL-1.2" 4330 4331 :term:`LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE` 4332 Setting ``LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE`` to "1" causes the OpenEmbedded 4333 build system to create an extra package (i.e. 4334 ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}-lic``) for each recipe and to add 4335 those packages to the 4336 :term:`RRECOMMENDS`\ ``_${PN}``. 4337 4338 The ``${PN}-lic`` package installs a directory in 4339 ``/usr/share/licenses`` named ``${PN}``, which is the recipe's base 4340 name, and installs files in that directory that contain license and 4341 copyright information (i.e. copies of the appropriate license files 4342 from ``meta/common-licenses`` that match the licenses specified in 4343 the :term:`LICENSE` variable of the recipe metadata 4344 and copies of files marked in 4345 :term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM` as containing 4346 license text). 4347 4348 For related information on providing license text, see the 4349 :term:`COPY_LIC_DIRS` variable, the 4350 :term:`COPY_LIC_MANIFEST` variable, and the 4351 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:providing license text`" 4352 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 4353 4354 :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS` 4355 Specifies additional flags for a recipe you must whitelist through 4356 :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST` in 4357 order to allow the recipe to be built. When providing multiple flags, 4358 separate them with spaces. 4359 4360 This value is independent of :term:`LICENSE` and is 4361 typically used to mark recipes that might require additional licenses 4362 in order to be used in a commercial product. For more information, 4363 see the 4364 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling commercially licensed recipes`" 4365 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 4366 4367 :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST` 4368 Lists license flags that when specified in 4369 :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS` within a recipe should not 4370 prevent that recipe from being built. This practice is otherwise 4371 known as "whitelisting" license flags. For more information, see the 4372 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling commercially licensed recipes`" 4373 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 4374 4375 :term:`LICENSE_PATH` 4376 Path to additional licenses used during the build. By default, the 4377 OpenEmbedded build system uses ``COMMON_LICENSE_DIR`` to define the 4378 directory that holds common license text used during the build. The 4379 ``LICENSE_PATH`` variable allows you to extend that location to other 4380 areas that have additional licenses: 4381 :: 4382 4383 LICENSE_PATH += "path-to-additional-common-licenses" 4384 4385 :term:`LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE` 4386 Defines the kernel type to be used in assembling the configuration. 4387 The linux-yocto recipes define "standard", "tiny", and "preempt-rt" 4388 kernel types. See the ":ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:kernel types`" 4389 section in the 4390 Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual for more information on 4391 kernel types. 4392 4393 If you do not specify a ``LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE``, it defaults to 4394 "standard". Together with :term:`KMACHINE`, the 4395 ``LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE`` variable defines the search arguments used by 4396 the kernel tools to find the appropriate description within the 4397 kernel :term:`Metadata` with which to build out the sources 4398 and configuration. 4399 4400 :term:`LINUX_VERSION` 4401 The Linux version from ``kernel.org`` on which the Linux kernel image 4402 being built using the OpenEmbedded build system is based. You define 4403 this variable in the kernel recipe. For example, the 4404 ``linux-yocto-3.4.bb`` kernel recipe found in 4405 ``meta/recipes-kernel/linux`` defines the variables as follows: 4406 :: 4407 4408 LINUX_VERSION ?= "3.4.24" 4409 4410 The ``LINUX_VERSION`` variable is used to define :term:`PV` 4411 for the recipe: 4412 :: 4413 4414 PV = "${LINUX_VERSION}+git${SRCPV}" 4415 4416 :term:`LINUX_VERSION_EXTENSION` 4417 A string extension compiled into the version string of the Linux 4418 kernel built with the OpenEmbedded build system. You define this 4419 variable in the kernel recipe. For example, the linux-yocto kernel 4420 recipes all define the variable as follows: 4421 :: 4422 4423 LINUX_VERSION_EXTENSION ?= "-yocto-${LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE}" 4424 4425 Defining this variable essentially sets the Linux kernel 4426 configuration item ``CONFIG_LOCALVERSION``, which is visible through 4427 the ``uname`` command. Here is an example that shows the extension 4428 assuming it was set as previously shown: 4429 :: 4430 4431 $ uname -r 4432 3.7.0-rc8-custom 4433 4434 :term:`LOG_DIR` 4435 Specifies the directory to which the OpenEmbedded build system writes 4436 overall log files. The default directory is ``${TMPDIR}/log``. 4437 4438 For the directory containing logs specific to each task, see the 4439 :term:`T` variable. 4440 4441 :term:`MACHINE` 4442 Specifies the target device for which the image is built. You define 4443 ``MACHINE`` in the ``local.conf`` file found in the 4444 :term:`Build Directory`. By default, ``MACHINE`` is set to 4445 "qemux86", which is an x86-based architecture machine to be emulated 4446 using QEMU: 4447 :: 4448 4449 MACHINE ?= "qemux86" 4450 4451 The variable corresponds to a machine configuration file of the same 4452 name, through which machine-specific configurations are set. Thus, 4453 when ``MACHINE`` is set to "qemux86" there exists the corresponding 4454 ``qemux86.conf`` machine configuration file, which can be found in 4455 the :term:`Source Directory` in 4456 ``meta/conf/machine``. 4457 4458 The list of machines supported by the Yocto Project as shipped 4459 include the following: 4460 :: 4461 4462 MACHINE ?= "qemuarm" 4463 MACHINE ?= "qemuarm64" 4464 MACHINE ?= "qemumips" 4465 MACHINE ?= "qemumips64" 4466 MACHINE ?= "qemuppc" 4467 MACHINE ?= "qemux86" 4468 MACHINE ?= "qemux86-64" 4469 MACHINE ?= "genericx86" 4470 MACHINE ?= "genericx86-64" 4471 MACHINE ?= "beaglebone" 4472 MACHINE ?= "edgerouter" 4473 4474 The last five are Yocto Project reference hardware 4475 boards, which are provided in the ``meta-yocto-bsp`` layer. 4476 4477 .. note:: 4478 4479 Adding additional Board Support Package (BSP) layers to your 4480 configuration adds new possible settings for ``MACHINE``. 4481 4482 :term:`MACHINE_ARCH` 4483 Specifies the name of the machine-specific architecture. This 4484 variable is set automatically from :term:`MACHINE` or 4485 :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH`. You should not hand-edit 4486 the ``MACHINE_ARCH`` variable. 4487 4488 :term:`MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RDEPENDS` 4489 A list of required machine-specific packages to install as part of 4490 the image being built. The build process depends on these packages 4491 being present. Furthermore, because this is a "machine-essential" 4492 variable, the list of packages are essential for the machine to boot. 4493 The impact of this variable affects images based on 4494 ``packagegroup-core-boot``, including the ``core-image-minimal`` 4495 image. 4496 4497 This variable is similar to the 4498 ``MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS`` variable with the exception 4499 that the image being built has a build dependency on the variable's 4500 list of packages. In other words, the image will not build if a file 4501 in this list is not found. 4502 4503 As an example, suppose the machine for which you are building 4504 requires ``example-init`` to be run during boot to initialize the 4505 hardware. In this case, you would use the following in the machine's 4506 ``.conf`` configuration file: 4507 :: 4508 4509 MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RDEPENDS += "example-init" 4510 4511 :term:`MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS` 4512 A list of recommended machine-specific packages to install as part of 4513 the image being built. The build process does not depend on these 4514 packages being present. However, because this is a 4515 "machine-essential" variable, the list of packages are essential for 4516 the machine to boot. The impact of this variable affects images based 4517 on ``packagegroup-core-boot``, including the ``core-image-minimal`` 4518 image. 4519 4520 This variable is similar to the ``MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`` 4521 variable with the exception that the image being built does not have 4522 a build dependency on the variable's list of packages. In other 4523 words, the image will still build if a package in this list is not 4524 found. Typically, this variable is used to handle essential kernel 4525 modules, whose functionality may be selected to be built into the 4526 kernel rather than as a module, in which case a package will not be 4527 produced. 4528 4529 Consider an example where you have a custom kernel where a specific 4530 touchscreen driver is required for the machine to be usable. However, 4531 the driver can be built as a module or into the kernel depending on 4532 the kernel configuration. If the driver is built as a module, you 4533 want it to be installed. But, when the driver is built into the 4534 kernel, you still want the build to succeed. This variable sets up a 4535 "recommends" relationship so that in the latter case, the build will 4536 not fail due to the missing package. To accomplish this, assuming the 4537 package for the module was called ``kernel-module-ab123``, you would 4538 use the following in the machine's ``.conf`` configuration file: 4539 :: 4540 4541 MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS += "kernel-module-ab123" 4542 4543 .. note:: 4544 4545 In this example, the ``kernel-module-ab123`` recipe needs to 4546 explicitly set its :term:`PACKAGES` variable to ensure that BitBake 4547 does not use the kernel recipe's :term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC` variable to 4548 satisfy the dependency. 4549 4550 Some examples of these machine essentials are flash, screen, 4551 keyboard, mouse, or touchscreen drivers (depending on the machine). 4552 4553 :term:`MACHINE_EXTRA_RDEPENDS` 4554 A list of machine-specific packages to install as part of the image 4555 being built that are not essential for the machine to boot. However, 4556 the build process for more fully-featured images depends on the 4557 packages being present. 4558 4559 This variable affects all images based on ``packagegroup-base``, 4560 which does not include the ``core-image-minimal`` or 4561 ``core-image-full-cmdline`` images. 4562 4563 The variable is similar to the ``MACHINE_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS`` variable 4564 with the exception that the image being built has a build dependency 4565 on the variable's list of packages. In other words, the image will 4566 not build if a file in this list is not found. 4567 4568 An example is a machine that has WiFi capability but is not essential 4569 for the machine to boot the image. However, if you are building a 4570 more fully-featured image, you want to enable the WiFi. The package 4571 containing the firmware for the WiFi hardware is always expected to 4572 exist, so it is acceptable for the build process to depend upon 4573 finding the package. In this case, assuming the package for the 4574 firmware was called ``wifidriver-firmware``, you would use the 4575 following in the ``.conf`` file for the machine: 4576 :: 4577 4578 MACHINE_EXTRA_RDEPENDS += "wifidriver-firmware" 4579 4580 :term:`MACHINE_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS` 4581 A list of machine-specific packages to install as part of the image 4582 being built that are not essential for booting the machine. The image 4583 being built has no build dependency on this list of packages. 4584 4585 This variable affects only images based on ``packagegroup-base``, 4586 which does not include the ``core-image-minimal`` or 4587 ``core-image-full-cmdline`` images. 4588 4589 This variable is similar to the ``MACHINE_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`` variable 4590 with the exception that the image being built does not have a build 4591 dependency on the variable's list of packages. In other words, the 4592 image will build if a file in this list is not found. 4593 4594 An example is a machine that has WiFi capability but is not essential 4595 For the machine to boot the image. However, if you are building a 4596 more fully-featured image, you want to enable WiFi. In this case, the 4597 package containing the WiFi kernel module will not be produced if the 4598 WiFi driver is built into the kernel, in which case you still want 4599 the build to succeed instead of failing as a result of the package 4600 not being found. To accomplish this, assuming the package for the 4601 module was called ``kernel-module-examplewifi``, you would use the 4602 following in the ``.conf`` file for the machine: 4603 :: 4604 4605 MACHINE_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS += "kernel-module-examplewifi" 4606 4607 :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES` 4608 Specifies the list of hardware features the 4609 :term:`MACHINE` is capable of supporting. For related 4610 information on enabling features, see the 4611 :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`, 4612 :term:`COMBINED_FEATURES`, and 4613 :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` variables. 4614 4615 For a list of hardware features supported by the Yocto Project as 4616 shipped, see the ":ref:`ref-features-machine`" section. 4617 4618 :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL` 4619 Features to be added to ``MACHINE_FEATURES`` if not also present in 4620 ``MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED``. 4621 4622 This variable is set in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file. It is 4623 not intended to be user-configurable. It is best to just reference 4624 the variable to see which machine features are being backfilled for 4625 all machine configurations. See the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`" 4626 section for more information. 4627 4628 :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED` 4629 Features from ``MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL`` that should not be 4630 backfilled (i.e. added to ``MACHINE_FEATURES``) during the build. See 4631 the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`" section for more information. 4632 4633 :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES` 4634 A colon-separated list of overrides that apply to the current 4635 machine. By default, this list includes the value of 4636 :term:`MACHINE`. 4637 4638 You can extend ``MACHINEOVERRIDES`` to add extra overrides that 4639 should apply to a machine. For example, all machines emulated in QEMU 4640 (e.g. ``qemuarm``, ``qemux86``, and so forth) include a file named 4641 ``meta/conf/machine/include/qemu.inc`` that prepends the following 4642 override to ``MACHINEOVERRIDES``: 4643 :: 4644 4645 MACHINEOVERRIDES =. "qemuall:" 4646 4647 This 4648 override allows variables to be overridden for all machines emulated 4649 in QEMU, like in the following example from the ``connman-conf`` 4650 recipe: 4651 :: 4652 4653 SRC_URI_append_qemuall = " file://wired.config \ 4654 file://wired-setup \ 4655 " 4656 4657 The underlying mechanism behind 4658 ``MACHINEOVERRIDES`` is simply that it is included in the default 4659 value of :term:`OVERRIDES`. 4660 4661 :term:`MAINTAINER` 4662 The email address of the distribution maintainer. 4663 4664 :term:`MIRRORS` 4665 Specifies additional paths from which the OpenEmbedded build system 4666 gets source code. When the build system searches for source code, it 4667 first tries the local download directory. If that location fails, the 4668 build system tries locations defined by 4669 :term:`PREMIRRORS`, the upstream source, and then 4670 locations specified by ``MIRRORS`` in that order. 4671 4672 Assuming your distribution (:term:`DISTRO`) is "poky", 4673 the default value for ``MIRRORS`` is defined in the 4674 ``conf/distro/poky.conf`` file in the ``meta-poky`` Git repository. 4675 4676 :term:`MLPREFIX` 4677 Specifies a prefix has been added to :term:`PN` to create a 4678 special version of a recipe or package (i.e. a Multilib version). The 4679 variable is used in places where the prefix needs to be added to or 4680 removed from a the name (e.g. the :term:`BPN` variable). 4681 ``MLPREFIX`` gets set when a prefix has been added to ``PN``. 4682 4683 .. note:: 4684 4685 The "ML" in ``MLPREFIX`` stands for "MultiLib". This representation is 4686 historical and comes from a time when ``nativesdk`` was a suffix 4687 rather than a prefix on the recipe name. When ``nativesdk`` was turned 4688 into a prefix, it made sense to set ``MLPREFIX`` for it as well. 4689 4690 To help understand when ``MLPREFIX`` might be needed, consider when 4691 :term:`BBCLASSEXTEND` is used to provide a 4692 ``nativesdk`` version of a recipe in addition to the target version. 4693 If that recipe declares build-time dependencies on tasks in other 4694 recipes by using :term:`DEPENDS`, then a dependency on 4695 "foo" will automatically get rewritten to a dependency on 4696 "nativesdk-foo". However, dependencies like the following will not 4697 get rewritten automatically: 4698 :: 4699 4700 do_foo[depends] += "recipe:do_foo" 4701 4702 If you want such a dependency to also get transformed, you can do the 4703 following: 4704 :: 4705 4706 do_foo[depends] += "${MLPREFIX}recipe:do_foo" 4707 4708 module_autoload 4709 This variable has been replaced by the ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD`` 4710 variable. You should replace all occurrences of ``module_autoload`` 4711 with additions to ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD``, for example: 4712 :: 4713 4714 module_autoload_rfcomm = "rfcomm" 4715 4716 should now be replaced with: 4717 :: 4718 4719 KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD += "rfcomm" 4720 4721 See the :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD` variable for more information. 4722 4723 module_conf 4724 Specifies `modprobe.d <https://linux.die.net/man/5/modprobe.d>`_ 4725 syntax lines for inclusion in the ``/etc/modprobe.d/modname.conf`` 4726 file. 4727 4728 You can use this variable anywhere that it can be recognized by the 4729 kernel recipe or out-of-tree kernel module recipe (e.g. a machine 4730 configuration file, a distribution configuration file, an append file 4731 for the recipe, or the recipe itself). If you use this variable, you 4732 must also be sure to list the module name in the 4733 :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD` 4734 variable. 4735 4736 Here is the general syntax: 4737 :: 4738 4739 module_conf_module_name = "modprobe.d-syntax" 4740 4741 You must use the kernel module name override. 4742 4743 Run ``man modprobe.d`` in the shell to find out more information on 4744 the exact syntax you want to provide with ``module_conf``. 4745 4746 Including ``module_conf`` causes the OpenEmbedded build system to 4747 populate the ``/etc/modprobe.d/modname.conf`` file with 4748 ``modprobe.d`` syntax lines. Here is an example that adds the options 4749 ``arg1`` and ``arg2`` to a module named ``mymodule``: 4750 :: 4751 4752 module_conf_mymodule = "options mymodule arg1=val1 arg2=val2" 4753 4754 For information on how to specify kernel modules to auto-load on 4755 boot, see the :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD` variable. 4756 4757 :term:`MODULE_TARBALL_DEPLOY` 4758 Controls creation of the ``modules-*.tgz`` file. Set this variable to 4759 "0" to disable creation of this file, which contains all of the 4760 kernel modules resulting from a kernel build. 4761 4762 :term:`MODULE_TARBALL_LINK_NAME` 4763 The link name of the kernel module tarball. This variable is set in 4764 the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows: 4765 :: 4766 4767 MODULE_TARBALL_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}" 4768 4769 The value 4770 of the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the 4771 same file, has the following value: 4772 :: 4773 4774 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}" 4775 4776 See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional information. 4777 4778 :term:`MODULE_TARBALL_NAME` 4779 The base name of the kernel module tarball. This variable is set in 4780 the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows: 4781 :: 4782 4783 MODULE_TARBALL_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}" 4784 4785 The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` variable, 4786 which is set in the same file, has the following value: 4787 :: 4788 4789 KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" 4790 4791 :term:`MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS` 4792 Uniquely identifies the type of the target system for which packages 4793 are being built. This variable allows output for different types of 4794 target systems to be put into different subdirectories of the same 4795 output directory. 4796 4797 The default value of this variable is: 4798 :: 4799 4800 ${PACKAGE_ARCH}${TARGET_VENDOR}-${TARGET_OS} 4801 4802 Some classes (e.g. 4803 :ref:`cross-canadian <ref-classes-cross-canadian>`) modify the 4804 ``MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS`` value. 4805 4806 See the :term:`STAMP` variable for an example. See the 4807 :term:`STAGING_DIR_TARGET` variable for more information. 4808 4809 :term:`NATIVELSBSTRING` 4810 A string identifying the host distribution. Strings consist of the 4811 host distributor ID followed by the release, as reported by the 4812 ``lsb_release`` tool or as read from ``/etc/lsb-release``. For 4813 example, when running a build on Ubuntu 12.10, the value is 4814 "Ubuntu-12.10". If this information is unable to be determined, the 4815 value resolves to "Unknown". 4816 4817 This variable is used by default to isolate native shared state 4818 packages for different distributions (e.g. to avoid problems with 4819 ``glibc`` version incompatibilities). Additionally, the variable is 4820 checked against 4821 :term:`SANITY_TESTED_DISTROS` if that 4822 variable is set. 4823 4824 :term:`NM` 4825 The minimal command and arguments to run ``nm``. 4826 4827 :term:`NO_GENERIC_LICENSE` 4828 Avoids QA errors when you use a non-common, non-CLOSED license in a 4829 recipe. Packages exist, such as the linux-firmware package, with many 4830 licenses that are not in any way common. Also, new licenses are added 4831 occasionally to avoid introducing a lot of common license files, 4832 which are only applicable to a specific package. 4833 ``NO_GENERIC_LICENSE`` is used to allow copying a license that does 4834 not exist in common licenses. 4835 4836 The following example shows how to add ``NO_GENERIC_LICENSE`` to a 4837 recipe: 4838 :: 4839 4840 NO_GENERIC_LICENSE[license_name] = "license_file_in_fetched_source" 4841 4842 The following is an example that 4843 uses the ``LICENSE.Abilis.txt`` file as the license from the fetched 4844 source: 4845 :: 4846 4847 NO_GENERIC_LICENSE[Firmware-Abilis] = "LICENSE.Abilis.txt" 4848 4849 :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS` 4850 Prevents installation of all "recommended-only" packages. 4851 Recommended-only packages are packages installed only through the 4852 :term:`RRECOMMENDS` variable). Setting the 4853 ``NO_RECOMMENDATIONS`` variable to "1" turns this feature on: :: 4854 4855 NO_RECOMMENDATIONS = "1" 4856 4857 You can set this variable globally in your ``local.conf`` file or you 4858 can attach it to a specific image recipe by using the recipe name 4859 override: :: 4860 4861 NO_RECOMMENDATIONS_pn-target_image = "1" 4862 4863 It is important to realize that if you choose to not install packages 4864 using this variable and some other packages are dependent on them 4865 (i.e. listed in a recipe's :term:`RDEPENDS` 4866 variable), the OpenEmbedded build system ignores your request and 4867 will install the packages to avoid dependency errors. 4868 4869 .. note:: 4870 4871 Some recommended packages might be required for certain system 4872 functionality, such as kernel modules. It is up to you to add 4873 packages with the :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL` variable. 4874 4875 Support for this variable exists only when using the IPK and RPM 4876 packaging backend. Support does not exist for DEB. 4877 4878 See the :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS` and 4879 the :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE` variables for 4880 related information. 4881 4882 :term:`NOAUTOPACKAGEDEBUG` 4883 Disables auto package from splitting ``.debug`` files. If a recipe 4884 requires ``FILES_${PN}-dbg`` to be set manually, the 4885 ``NOAUTOPACKAGEDEBUG`` can be defined allowing you to define the 4886 content of the debug package. For example: 4887 :: 4888 4889 NOAUTOPACKAGEDEBUG = "1" 4890 FILES_${PN}-dev = "${includedir}/${QT_DIR_NAME}/Qt/*" 4891 FILES_${PN}-dbg = "/usr/src/debug/" 4892 FILES_${QT_BASE_NAME}-demos-doc = "${docdir}/${QT_DIR_NAME}/qch/qt.qch" 4893 4894 :term:`OBJCOPY` 4895 The minimal command and arguments to run ``objcopy``. 4896 4897 :term:`OBJDUMP` 4898 The minimal command and arguments to run ``objdump``. 4899 4900 :term:`OE_BINCONFIG_EXTRA_MANGLE` 4901 When inheriting the :ref:`binconfig <ref-classes-binconfig>` class, 4902 this variable specifies additional arguments passed to the "sed" 4903 command. The sed command alters any paths in configuration scripts 4904 that have been set up during compilation. Inheriting this class 4905 results in all paths in these scripts being changed to point into the 4906 ``sysroots/`` directory so that all builds that use the script will 4907 use the correct directories for the cross compiling layout. 4908 4909 See the ``meta/classes/binconfig.bbclass`` in the 4910 :term:`Source Directory` for details on how this class 4911 applies these additional sed command arguments. For general 4912 information on the ``binconfig`` class, see the 4913 ":ref:`binconfig.bbclass <ref-classes-binconfig>`" section. 4914 4915 :term:`OE_IMPORTS` 4916 An internal variable used to tell the OpenEmbedded build system what 4917 Python modules to import for every Python function run by the system. 4918 4919 .. note:: 4920 4921 Do not set this variable. It is for internal use only. 4922 4923 :term:`OE_INIT_ENV_SCRIPT` 4924 The name of the build environment setup script for the purposes of 4925 setting up the environment within the extensible SDK. The default 4926 value is "oe-init-build-env". 4927 4928 If you use a custom script to set up your build environment, set the 4929 ``OE_INIT_ENV_SCRIPT`` variable to its name. 4930 4931 :term:`OE_TERMINAL` 4932 Controls how the OpenEmbedded build system spawns interactive 4933 terminals on the host development system (e.g. using the BitBake 4934 command with the ``-c devshell`` command-line option). For more 4935 information, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:using a development shell`" section in 4936 the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 4937 4938 You can use the following values for the ``OE_TERMINAL`` variable: 4939 4940 - auto 4941 - gnome 4942 - xfce 4943 - rxvt 4944 - screen 4945 - konsole 4946 - none 4947 4948 :term:`OEROOT` 4949 The directory from which the top-level build environment setup script 4950 is sourced. The Yocto Project provides a top-level build environment 4951 setup script: :ref:`structure-core-script`. When you run this 4952 script, the ``OEROOT`` variable resolves to the directory that 4953 contains the script. 4954 4955 For additional information on how this variable is used, see the 4956 initialization script. 4957 4958 :term:`OLDEST_KERNEL` 4959 Declares the oldest version of the Linux kernel that the produced 4960 binaries must support. This variable is passed into the build of the 4961 Embedded GNU C Library (``glibc``). 4962 4963 The default for this variable comes from the 4964 ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file. You can override this 4965 default by setting the variable in a custom distribution 4966 configuration file. 4967 4968 :term:`OVERRIDES` 4969 A colon-separated list of overrides that currently apply. Overrides 4970 are a BitBake mechanism that allows variables to be selectively 4971 overridden at the end of parsing. The set of overrides in 4972 ``OVERRIDES`` represents the "state" during building, which includes 4973 the current recipe being built, the machine for which it is being 4974 built, and so forth. 4975 4976 As an example, if the string "an-override" appears as an element in 4977 the colon-separated list in ``OVERRIDES``, then the following 4978 assignment will override ``FOO`` with the value "overridden" at the 4979 end of parsing: 4980 :: 4981 4982 FOO_an-override = "overridden" 4983 4984 See the 4985 ":ref:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:conditional syntax (overrides)`" 4986 section in the BitBake User Manual for more information on the 4987 overrides mechanism. 4988 4989 The default value of ``OVERRIDES`` includes the values of the 4990 :term:`CLASSOVERRIDE`, 4991 :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES`, and 4992 :term:`DISTROOVERRIDES` variables. Another 4993 important override included by default is ``pn-${PN}``. This override 4994 allows variables to be set for a single recipe within configuration 4995 (``.conf``) files. Here is an example: 4996 :: 4997 4998 FOO_pn-myrecipe = "myrecipe-specific value" 4999 5000 .. note:: 5001 5002 An easy way to see what overrides apply is to search for ``OVERRIDES`` 5003 in the output of the ``bitbake -e`` command. See the 5004 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:viewing variable values`" section in the Yocto 5005 Project Development Tasks Manual for more information. 5006 5007 :term:`P` 5008 The recipe name and version. ``P`` is comprised of the following: 5009 :: 5010 5011 ${PN}-${PV} 5012 5013 :term:`PACKAGE_ADD_METADATA` 5014 This variable defines additional metdata to add to packages. 5015 5016 You may find you need to inject additional metadata into packages. 5017 This variable allows you to do that by setting the injected data as 5018 the value. Multiple fields can be added by splitting the content with 5019 the literal separator "\n". 5020 5021 The suffixes '_IPK', '_DEB', or '_RPM' can be applied to the variable 5022 to do package type specific settings. It can also be made package 5023 specific by using the package name as a suffix. 5024 5025 You can find out more about applying this variable in the 5026 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:adding custom metadata to packages`" 5027 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5028 5029 :term:`PACKAGE_ARCH` 5030 The architecture of the resulting package or packages. 5031 5032 By default, the value of this variable is set to 5033 :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH` when building for the 5034 target, :term:`BUILD_ARCH` when building for the 5035 build host, and "${SDK_ARCH}-${SDKPKGSUFFIX}" when building for the 5036 SDK. 5037 5038 .. note:: 5039 5040 See :term:`SDK_ARCH` for more information. 5041 5042 However, if your recipe's output packages are built specific to the 5043 target machine rather than generally for the architecture of the 5044 machine, you should set ``PACKAGE_ARCH`` to the value of 5045 :term:`MACHINE_ARCH` in the recipe as follows: 5046 :: 5047 5048 PACKAGE_ARCH = "${MACHINE_ARCH}" 5049 5050 :term:`PACKAGE_ARCHS` 5051 Specifies a list of architectures compatible with the target machine. 5052 This variable is set automatically and should not normally be 5053 hand-edited. Entries are separated using spaces and listed in order 5054 of priority. The default value for ``PACKAGE_ARCHS`` is "all any 5055 noarch ${PACKAGE_EXTRA_ARCHS} ${MACHINE_ARCH}". 5056 5057 :term:`PACKAGE_BEFORE_PN` 5058 Enables easily adding packages to ``PACKAGES`` before ``${PN}`` so 5059 that those added packages can pick up files that would normally be 5060 included in the default package. 5061 5062 :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` 5063 This variable, which is set in the ``local.conf`` configuration file 5064 found in the ``conf`` folder of the 5065 :term:`Build Directory`, specifies the package manager the 5066 OpenEmbedded build system uses when packaging data. 5067 5068 You can provide one or more of the following arguments for the 5069 variable: PACKAGE_CLASSES ?= "package_rpm package_deb package_ipk 5070 package_tar" 5071 5072 .. note:: 5073 5074 While it is a legal option, the ``package_tar`` 5075 class has limited functionality due to no support for package 5076 dependencies by that backend. Therefore, it is recommended that 5077 you do not use it. 5078 5079 The build system uses only the first argument in the list as the 5080 package manager when creating your image or SDK. However, packages 5081 will be created using any additional packaging classes you specify. 5082 For example, if you use the following in your ``local.conf`` file: 5083 :: 5084 5085 PACKAGE_CLASSES ?= "package_ipk" 5086 5087 The OpenEmbedded build system uses 5088 the IPK package manager to create your image or SDK. 5089 5090 For information on packaging and build performance effects as a 5091 result of the package manager in use, see the 5092 ":ref:`package.bbclass <ref-classes-package>`" section. 5093 5094 :term:`PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE` 5095 Determines how to split up the binary and debug information when 5096 creating ``*-dbg`` packages to be used with the GNU Project Debugger 5097 (GDB). 5098 5099 With the ``PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE`` variable, you can control 5100 where debug information, which can include or exclude source files, 5101 is stored: 5102 5103 - ".debug": Debug symbol files are placed next to the binary in a 5104 ``.debug`` directory on the target. For example, if a binary is 5105 installed into ``/bin``, the corresponding debug symbol files are 5106 installed in ``/bin/.debug``. Source files are placed in 5107 ``/usr/src/debug``. 5108 5109 - "debug-file-directory": Debug symbol files are placed under 5110 ``/usr/lib/debug`` on the target, and separated by the path from 5111 where the binary is installed. For example, if a binary is 5112 installed in ``/bin``, the corresponding debug symbols are 5113 installed in ``/usr/lib/debug/bin``. Source files are placed in 5114 ``/usr/src/debug``. 5115 5116 - "debug-without-src": The same behavior as ".debug" previously 5117 described with the exception that no source files are installed. 5118 5119 - "debug-with-srcpkg": The same behavior as ".debug" previously 5120 described with the exception that all source files are placed in a 5121 separate ``*-src`` pkg. This is the default behavior. 5122 5123 You can find out more about debugging using GDB by reading the 5124 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:debugging with the gnu project debugger (gdb) remotely`" section 5125 in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5126 5127 :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE_COMPLEMENTARY` 5128 Prevents specific packages from being installed when you are 5129 installing complementary packages. 5130 5131 You might find that you want to prevent installing certain packages 5132 when you are installing complementary packages. For example, if you 5133 are using :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` to install 5134 ``dev-pkgs``, you might not want to install all packages from a 5135 particular multilib. If you find yourself in this situation, you can 5136 use the ``PACKAGE_EXCLUDE_COMPLEMENTARY`` variable to specify regular 5137 expressions to match the packages you want to exclude. 5138 5139 :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE` 5140 Lists packages that should not be installed into an image. For 5141 example: 5142 :: 5143 5144 PACKAGE_EXCLUDE = "package_name package_name package_name ..." 5145 5146 You can set this variable globally in your ``local.conf`` file or you 5147 can attach it to a specific image recipe by using the recipe name 5148 override: 5149 :: 5150 5151 PACKAGE_EXCLUDE_pn-target_image = "package_name" 5152 5153 If you choose to not install a package using this variable and some 5154 other package is dependent on it (i.e. listed in a recipe's 5155 :term:`RDEPENDS` variable), the OpenEmbedded build 5156 system generates a fatal installation error. Because the build system 5157 halts the process with a fatal error, you can use the variable with 5158 an iterative development process to remove specific components from a 5159 system. 5160 5161 Support for this variable exists only when using the IPK and RPM 5162 packaging backend. Support does not exist for DEB. 5163 5164 See the :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS` and the 5165 :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS` variables for 5166 related information. 5167 5168 :term:`PACKAGE_EXTRA_ARCHS` 5169 Specifies the list of architectures compatible with the device CPU. 5170 This variable is useful when you build for several different devices 5171 that use miscellaneous processors such as XScale and ARM926-EJS. 5172 5173 :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS` 5174 Optionally specifies the package architectures used as part of the 5175 package feed URIs during the build. When used, the 5176 ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variable is appended to the final package feed 5177 URI, which is constructed using the 5178 :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS` and 5179 :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS` 5180 variables. 5181 5182 .. note:: 5183 5184 You can use the ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` 5185 variable to whitelist specific package architectures. If you do 5186 not need to whitelist specific architectures, which is a common 5187 case, you can omit this variable. Omitting the variable results in 5188 all available architectures for the current machine being included 5189 into remote package feeds. 5190 5191 Consider the following example where the ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``, 5192 ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS``, and ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variables are 5193 defined in your ``local.conf`` file: 5194 :: 5195 5196 PACKAGE_FEED_URIS = "https://example.com/packagerepos/release \ 5197 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates" 5198 PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS = "rpm rpm-dev" 5199 PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS = "all core2-64" 5200 5201 Given these settings, the resulting package feeds are as follows: 5202 5203 .. code-block:: none 5204 5205 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/all 5206 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/core2-64 5207 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/all 5208 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/core2-64 5209 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/all 5210 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/core2-64 5211 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/all 5212 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/core2-64 5213 5214 :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS` 5215 Specifies the base path used when constructing package feed URIs. The 5216 ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`` variable makes up the middle portion of a 5217 package feed URI used by the OpenEmbedded build system. The base path 5218 lies between the :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS` 5219 and :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS` variables. 5220 5221 Consider the following example where the ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``, 5222 ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS``, and ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variables are 5223 defined in your ``local.conf`` file: 5224 :: 5225 5226 PACKAGE_FEED_URIS = "https://example.com/packagerepos/release \ 5227 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates" 5228 PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS = "rpm rpm-dev" 5229 PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS = "all core2-64" 5230 5231 Given these settings, the resulting package feeds are as follows: 5232 5233 .. code-block:: none 5234 5235 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/all 5236 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/core2-64 5237 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/all 5238 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/core2-64 5239 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/all 5240 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/core2-64 5241 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/all 5242 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/core2-64 5243 5244 :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS` 5245 Specifies the front portion of the package feed URI used by the 5246 OpenEmbedded build system. Each final package feed URI is comprised 5247 of ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``, 5248 :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`, and 5249 :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS` variables. 5250 5251 Consider the following example where the ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``, 5252 ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS``, and ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variables are 5253 defined in your ``local.conf`` file: 5254 :: 5255 5256 PACKAGE_FEED_URIS = "https://example.com/packagerepos/release \ 5257 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates" 5258 PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS = "rpm rpm-dev" 5259 PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS = "all core2-64" 5260 5261 Given these settings, the resulting package feeds are as follows: 5262 5263 .. code-block:: none 5264 5265 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/all 5266 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/core2-64 5267 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/all 5268 https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/core2-64 5269 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/all 5270 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/core2-64 5271 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/all 5272 https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/core2-64 5273 5274 :term:`PACKAGE_INSTALL` 5275 The final list of packages passed to the package manager for 5276 installation into the image. 5277 5278 Because the package manager controls actual installation of all 5279 packages, the list of packages passed using ``PACKAGE_INSTALL`` is 5280 not the final list of packages that are actually installed. This 5281 variable is internal to the image construction code. Consequently, in 5282 general, you should use the 5283 :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL` variable to specify 5284 packages for installation. The exception to this is when working with 5285 the :ref:`core-image-minimal-initramfs <ref-manual/images:images>` 5286 image. When working with an initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) image, 5287 use the ``PACKAGE_INSTALL`` variable. For information on creating an 5288 initramfs, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section 5289 in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5290 5291 :term:`PACKAGE_INSTALL_ATTEMPTONLY` 5292 Specifies a list of packages the OpenEmbedded build system attempts 5293 to install when creating an image. If a listed package fails to 5294 install, the build system does not generate an error. This variable 5295 is generally not user-defined. 5296 5297 :term:`PACKAGE_PREPROCESS_FUNCS` 5298 Specifies a list of functions run to pre-process the 5299 :term:`PKGD` directory prior to splitting the files out 5300 to individual packages. 5301 5302 :term:`PACKAGE_WRITE_DEPS` 5303 Specifies a list of dependencies for post-installation and 5304 pre-installation scripts on native/cross tools. If your 5305 post-installation or pre-installation script can execute at rootfs 5306 creation time rather than on the target but depends on a native tool 5307 in order to execute, you need to list the tools in 5308 ``PACKAGE_WRITE_DEPS``. 5309 5310 For information on running post-installation scripts, see the 5311 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:post-installation scripts`" 5312 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5313 5314 :term:`PACKAGECONFIG` 5315 This variable provides a means of enabling or disabling features of a 5316 recipe on a per-recipe basis. ``PACKAGECONFIG`` blocks are defined in 5317 recipes when you specify features and then arguments that define 5318 feature behaviors. Here is the basic block structure (broken over 5319 multiple lines for readability): 5320 :: 5321 5322 PACKAGECONFIG ??= "f1 f2 f3 ..." 5323 PACKAGECONFIG[f1] = "\ 5324 --with-f1, \ 5325 --without-f1, \ 5326 build-deps-for-f1, \ 5327 runtime-deps-for-f1, \ 5328 runtime-recommends-for-f1, \ 5329 packageconfig-conflicts-for-f1" 5330 PACKAGECONFIG[f2] = "\ 5331 ... and so on and so on ... 5332 5333 The ``PACKAGECONFIG`` variable itself specifies a space-separated 5334 list of the features to enable. Following the features, you can 5335 determine the behavior of each feature by providing up to six 5336 order-dependent arguments, which are separated by commas. You can 5337 omit any argument you like but must retain the separating commas. The 5338 order is important and specifies the following: 5339 5340 1. Extra arguments that should be added to the configure script 5341 argument list (:term:`EXTRA_OECONF` or 5342 :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`) if 5343 the feature is enabled. 5344 5345 2. Extra arguments that should be added to ``EXTRA_OECONF`` or 5346 ``PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`` if the feature is disabled. 5347 5348 3. Additional build dependencies (:term:`DEPENDS`) 5349 that should be added if the feature is enabled. 5350 5351 4. Additional runtime dependencies (:term:`RDEPENDS`) 5352 that should be added if the feature is enabled. 5353 5354 5. Additional runtime recommendations 5355 (:term:`RRECOMMENDS`) that should be added if 5356 the feature is enabled. 5357 5358 6. Any conflicting (that is, mutually exclusive) ``PACKAGECONFIG`` 5359 settings for this feature. 5360 5361 Consider the following ``PACKAGECONFIG`` block taken from the 5362 ``librsvg`` recipe. In this example the feature is ``gtk``, which has 5363 three arguments that determine the feature's behavior. 5364 :: 5365 5366 PACKAGECONFIG[gtk] = "--with-gtk3,--without-gtk3,gtk+3" 5367 5368 The 5369 ``--with-gtk3`` and ``gtk+3`` arguments apply only if the feature is 5370 enabled. In this case, ``--with-gtk3`` is added to the configure 5371 script argument list and ``gtk+3`` is added to ``DEPENDS``. On the 5372 other hand, if the feature is disabled say through a ``.bbappend`` 5373 file in another layer, then the second argument ``--without-gtk3`` is 5374 added to the configure script instead. 5375 5376 The basic ``PACKAGECONFIG`` structure previously described holds true 5377 regardless of whether you are creating a block or changing a block. 5378 When creating a block, use the structure inside your recipe. 5379 5380 If you want to change an existing ``PACKAGECONFIG`` block, you can do 5381 so one of two ways: 5382 5383 - *Append file:* Create an append file named 5384 recipename\ ``.bbappend`` in your layer and override the value of 5385 ``PACKAGECONFIG``. You can either completely override the 5386 variable: 5387 :: 5388 5389 PACKAGECONFIG = "f4 f5" 5390 5391 Or, you can just append the variable: 5392 :: 5393 5394 PACKAGECONFIG_append = " f4" 5395 5396 - *Configuration file:* This method is identical to changing the 5397 block through an append file except you edit your ``local.conf`` 5398 or ``mydistro.conf`` file. As with append files previously 5399 described, you can either completely override the variable: 5400 :: 5401 5402 PACKAGECONFIG_pn-recipename = "f4 f5" 5403 5404 Or, you can just amend the variable: 5405 :: 5406 5407 PACKAGECONFIG_append_pn-recipename = " f4" 5408 5409 :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS` 5410 A space-separated list of configuration options generated from the 5411 :term:`PACKAGECONFIG` setting. 5412 5413 Classes such as :ref:`autotools <ref-classes-autotools>` and 5414 :ref:`cmake <ref-classes-cmake>` use ``PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`` to 5415 pass ``PACKAGECONFIG`` options to ``configure`` and ``cmake``, 5416 respectively. If you are using ``PACKAGECONFIG`` but not a class that 5417 handles the ``do_configure`` task, then you need to use 5418 ``PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`` appropriately. 5419 5420 :term:`PACKAGEGROUP_DISABLE_COMPLEMENTARY` 5421 For recipes inheriting the 5422 :ref:`packagegroup <ref-classes-packagegroup>` class, setting 5423 ``PACKAGEGROUP_DISABLE_COMPLEMENTARY`` to "1" specifies that the 5424 normal complementary packages (i.e. ``-dev``, ``-dbg``, and so forth) 5425 should not be automatically created by the ``packagegroup`` recipe, 5426 which is the default behavior. 5427 5428 :term:`PACKAGES` 5429 The list of packages the recipe creates. The default value is the 5430 following: 5431 :: 5432 5433 ${PN}-dbg ${PN}-staticdev ${PN}-dev ${PN}-doc ${PN}-locale ${PACKAGE_BEFORE_PN} ${PN} 5434 5435 During packaging, the :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task 5436 goes through ``PACKAGES`` and uses the :term:`FILES` 5437 variable corresponding to each package to assign files to the 5438 package. If a file matches the ``FILES`` variable for more than one 5439 package in ``PACKAGES``, it will be assigned to the earliest 5440 (leftmost) package. 5441 5442 Packages in the variable's list that are empty (i.e. where none of 5443 the patterns in ``FILES_``\ pkg match any files installed by the 5444 :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task) are not generated, 5445 unless generation is forced through the 5446 :term:`ALLOW_EMPTY` variable. 5447 5448 :term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC` 5449 A promise that your recipe satisfies runtime dependencies for 5450 optional modules that are found in other recipes. 5451 ``PACKAGES_DYNAMIC`` does not actually satisfy the dependencies, it 5452 only states that they should be satisfied. For example, if a hard, 5453 runtime dependency (:term:`RDEPENDS`) of another 5454 package is satisfied at build time through the ``PACKAGES_DYNAMIC`` 5455 variable, but a package with the module name is never actually 5456 produced, then the other package will be broken. Thus, if you attempt 5457 to include that package in an image, you will get a dependency 5458 failure from the packaging system during the 5459 :ref:`ref-tasks-rootfs` task. 5460 5461 Typically, if there is a chance that such a situation can occur and 5462 the package that is not created is valid without the dependency being 5463 satisfied, then you should use :term:`RRECOMMENDS` 5464 (a soft runtime dependency) instead of ``RDEPENDS``. 5465 5466 For an example of how to use the ``PACKAGES_DYNAMIC`` variable when 5467 you are splitting packages, see the 5468 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:handling optional module packaging`" 5469 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5470 5471 :term:`PACKAGESPLITFUNCS` 5472 Specifies a list of functions run to perform additional splitting of 5473 files into individual packages. Recipes can either prepend to this 5474 variable or prepend to the ``populate_packages`` function in order to 5475 perform additional package splitting. In either case, the function 5476 should set :term:`PACKAGES`, 5477 :term:`FILES`, :term:`RDEPENDS` and 5478 other packaging variables appropriately in order to perform the 5479 desired splitting. 5480 5481 :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` 5482 Extra options passed to the ``make`` command during the 5483 :ref:`ref-tasks-compile` task in order to specify 5484 parallel compilation on the local build host. This variable is 5485 usually in the form "-j x", where x represents the maximum number of 5486 parallel threads ``make`` can run. 5487 5488 .. note:: 5489 5490 In order for ``PARALLEL_MAKE`` to be effective, ``make`` must be 5491 called with ``${``\ :term:`EXTRA_OEMAKE`\ ``}``. An easy way to ensure 5492 this is to use the ``oe_runmake`` function. 5493 5494 By default, the OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this 5495 variable to be equal to the number of cores the build system uses. 5496 5497 .. note:: 5498 5499 If the software being built experiences dependency issues during 5500 the ``do_compile`` task that result in race conditions, you can clear 5501 the ``PARALLEL_MAKE`` variable within the recipe as a workaround. For 5502 information on addressing race conditions, see the 5503 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:debugging parallel make races`" 5504 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5505 5506 For single socket systems (i.e. one CPU), you should not have to 5507 override this variable to gain optimal parallelism during builds. 5508 However, if you have very large systems that employ multiple physical 5509 CPUs, you might want to make sure the ``PARALLEL_MAKE`` variable is 5510 not set higher than "-j 20". 5511 5512 For more information on speeding up builds, see the 5513 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:speeding up a build`" 5514 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5515 5516 :term:`PARALLEL_MAKEINST` 5517 Extra options passed to the ``make install`` command during the 5518 :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task in order to specify 5519 parallel installation. This variable defaults to the value of 5520 :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE`. 5521 5522 .. note:: 5523 5524 In order for ``PARALLEL_MAKEINST`` to be effective, ``make`` must 5525 be called with 5526 ``${``\ :term:`EXTRA_OEMAKE`\ ``}``. An easy 5527 way to ensure this is to use the ``oe_runmake`` function. 5528 5529 If the software being built experiences dependency issues during 5530 the ``do_install`` task that result in race conditions, you can 5531 clear the ``PARALLEL_MAKEINST`` variable within the recipe as a 5532 workaround. For information on addressing race conditions, see the 5533 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:debugging parallel make races`" 5534 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5535 5536 :term:`PATCHRESOLVE` 5537 Determines the action to take when a patch fails. You can set this 5538 variable to one of two values: "noop" and "user". 5539 5540 The default value of "noop" causes the build to simply fail when the 5541 OpenEmbedded build system cannot successfully apply a patch. Setting 5542 the value to "user" causes the build system to launch a shell and 5543 places you in the right location so that you can manually resolve the 5544 conflicts. 5545 5546 Set this variable in your ``local.conf`` file. 5547 5548 :term:`PATCHTOOL` 5549 Specifies the utility used to apply patches for a recipe during the 5550 :ref:`ref-tasks-patch` task. You can specify one of 5551 three utilities: "patch", "quilt", or "git". The default utility used 5552 is "quilt" except for the quilt-native recipe itself. Because the 5553 quilt tool is not available at the time quilt-native is being 5554 patched, it uses "patch". 5555 5556 If you wish to use an alternative patching tool, set the variable in 5557 the recipe using one of the following: 5558 :: 5559 5560 PATCHTOOL = "patch" 5561 PATCHTOOL = "quilt" 5562 PATCHTOOL = "git" 5563 5564 :term:`PE` 5565 The epoch of the recipe. By default, this variable is unset. The 5566 variable is used to make upgrades possible when the versioning scheme 5567 changes in some backwards incompatible way. 5568 5569 ``PE`` is the default value of the :term:`PKGE` variable. 5570 5571 :term:`PF` 5572 Specifies the recipe or package name and includes all version and 5573 revision numbers (i.e. ``glibc-2.13-r20+svnr15508/`` and 5574 ``bash-4.2-r1/``). This variable is comprised of the following: 5575 ${:term:`PN`}-${:term:`EXTENDPE`}${:term:`PV`}-${:term:`PR`} 5576 5577 :term:`PIXBUF_PACKAGES` 5578 When inheriting the :ref:`pixbufcache <ref-classes-pixbufcache>` 5579 class, this variable identifies packages that contain the pixbuf 5580 loaders used with ``gdk-pixbuf``. By default, the ``pixbufcache`` 5581 class assumes that the loaders are in the recipe's main package (i.e. 5582 ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``). Use this variable if the 5583 loaders you need are in a package other than that main package. 5584 5585 :term:`PKG` 5586 The name of the resulting package created by the OpenEmbedded build 5587 system. 5588 5589 .. note:: 5590 5591 When using the ``PKG`` variable, you must use a package name override. 5592 5593 For example, when the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class 5594 renames the output package, it does so by setting 5595 ``PKG_packagename``. 5596 5597 :term:`PKG_CONFIG_PATH` 5598 The path to ``pkg-config`` files for the current build context. 5599 ``pkg-config`` reads this variable from the environment. 5600 5601 :term:`PKGD` 5602 Points to the destination directory for files to be packaged before 5603 they are split into individual packages. This directory defaults to 5604 the following: 5605 :: 5606 5607 ${WORKDIR}/package 5608 5609 Do not change this default. 5610 5611 :term:`PKGDATA_DIR` 5612 Points to a shared, global-state directory that holds data generated 5613 during the packaging process. During the packaging process, the 5614 :ref:`ref-tasks-packagedata` task packages data 5615 for each recipe and installs it into this temporary, shared area. 5616 This directory defaults to the following, which you should not 5617 change: 5618 :: 5619 5620 ${STAGING_DIR_HOST}/pkgdata 5621 5622 For examples of how this data is used, see the 5623 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`" 5624 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual and the 5625 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:viewing package information with \`\`oe-pkgdata-util\`\``" 5626 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. For more 5627 information on the shared, global-state directory, see 5628 :term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`. 5629 5630 :term:`PKGDEST` 5631 Points to the parent directory for files to be packaged after they 5632 have been split into individual packages. This directory defaults to 5633 the following: 5634 :: 5635 5636 ${WORKDIR}/packages-split 5637 5638 Under this directory, the build system creates directories for each 5639 package specified in :term:`PACKAGES`. Do not change 5640 this default. 5641 5642 :term:`PKGDESTWORK` 5643 Points to a temporary work area where the 5644 :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task saves package metadata. 5645 The ``PKGDESTWORK`` location defaults to the following: 5646 :: 5647 5648 ${WORKDIR}/pkgdata 5649 5650 Do not change this default. 5651 5652 The :ref:`ref-tasks-packagedata` task copies the 5653 package metadata from ``PKGDESTWORK`` to 5654 :term:`PKGDATA_DIR` to make it available globally. 5655 5656 :term:`PKGE` 5657 The epoch of the package(s) built by the recipe. By default, ``PKGE`` 5658 is set to :term:`PE`. 5659 5660 :term:`PKGR` 5661 The revision of the package(s) built by the recipe. By default, 5662 ``PKGR`` is set to :term:`PR`. 5663 5664 :term:`PKGV` 5665 The version of the package(s) built by the recipe. By default, 5666 ``PKGV`` is set to :term:`PV`. 5667 5668 :term:`PN` 5669 This variable can have two separate functions depending on the 5670 context: a recipe name or a resulting package name. 5671 5672 ``PN`` refers to a recipe name in the context of a file used by the 5673 OpenEmbedded build system as input to create a package. The name is 5674 normally extracted from the recipe file name. For example, if the 5675 recipe is named ``expat_2.0.1.bb``, then the default value of ``PN`` 5676 will be "expat". 5677 5678 The variable refers to a package name in the context of a file 5679 created or produced by the OpenEmbedded build system. 5680 5681 If applicable, the ``PN`` variable also contains any special suffix 5682 or prefix. For example, using ``bash`` to build packages for the 5683 native machine, ``PN`` is ``bash-native``. Using ``bash`` to build 5684 packages for the target and for Multilib, ``PN`` would be ``bash`` 5685 and ``lib64-bash``, respectively. 5686 5687 :term:`PNBLACKLIST` 5688 Lists recipes you do not want the OpenEmbedded build system to build. 5689 This variable works in conjunction with the 5690 :ref:`blacklist <ref-classes-blacklist>` class, which is inherited 5691 globally. 5692 5693 To prevent a recipe from being built, use the ``PNBLACKLIST`` 5694 variable in your ``local.conf`` file. Here is an example that 5695 prevents ``myrecipe`` from being built: 5696 :: 5697 5698 PNBLACKLIST[myrecipe] = "Not supported by our organization." 5699 5700 :term:`POPULATE_SDK_POST_HOST_COMMAND` 5701 Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build 5702 system has created the host part of the SDK. You can specify 5703 functions separated by semicolons: 5704 :: 5705 5706 POPULATE_SDK_POST_HOST_COMMAND += "function; ... " 5707 5708 If you need to pass the SDK path to a command within a function, you 5709 can use ``${SDK_DIR}``, which points to the parent directory used by 5710 the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK output. See the 5711 :term:`SDK_DIR` variable for more information. 5712 5713 :term:`POPULATE_SDK_POST_TARGET_COMMAND` 5714 Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build 5715 system has created the target part of the SDK. You can specify 5716 functions separated by semicolons: 5717 :: 5718 5719 POPULATE_SDK_POST_TARGET_COMMAND += "function; ... " 5720 5721 If you need to pass the SDK path to a command within a function, you 5722 can use ``${SDK_DIR}``, which points to the parent directory used by 5723 the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK output. See the 5724 :term:`SDK_DIR` variable for more information. 5725 5726 :term:`PR` 5727 The revision of the recipe. The default value for this variable is 5728 "r0". Subsequent revisions of the recipe conventionally have the 5729 values "r1", "r2", and so forth. When :term:`PV` increases, 5730 ``PR`` is conventionally reset to "r0". 5731 5732 .. note:: 5733 5734 The OpenEmbedded build system does not need the aid of ``PR`` 5735 to know when to rebuild a recipe. The build system uses the task 5736 :ref:`input checksums <overview-manual/concepts:checksums (signatures)>` along with the 5737 :ref:`stamp <structure-build-tmp-stamps>` and 5738 :ref:`overview-manual/concepts:shared state cache` 5739 mechanisms. 5740 5741 The ``PR`` variable primarily becomes significant when a package 5742 manager dynamically installs packages on an already built image. In 5743 this case, ``PR``, which is the default value of 5744 :term:`PKGR`, helps the package manager distinguish which 5745 package is the most recent one in cases where many packages have the 5746 same ``PV`` (i.e. ``PKGV``). A component having many packages with 5747 the same ``PV`` usually means that the packages all install the same 5748 upstream version, but with later (``PR``) version packages including 5749 packaging fixes. 5750 5751 .. note:: 5752 5753 ``PR`` does not need to be increased for changes that do not change the 5754 package contents or metadata. 5755 5756 Because manually managing ``PR`` can be cumbersome and error-prone, 5757 an automated solution exists. See the 5758 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:working with a pr service`" section 5759 in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for more information. 5760 5761 :term:`PREFERRED_PROVIDER` 5762 If multiple recipes provide the same item, this variable determines 5763 which recipe is preferred and thus provides the item (i.e. the 5764 preferred provider). You should always suffix this variable with the 5765 name of the provided item. And, you should define the variable using 5766 the preferred recipe's name (:term:`PN`). Here is a common 5767 example: 5768 :: 5769 5770 PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/kernel ?= "linux-yocto" 5771 5772 In the previous example, multiple recipes are providing "virtual/kernel". 5773 The ``PREFERRED_PROVIDER`` variable is set with the name (``PN``) of 5774 the recipe you prefer to provide "virtual/kernel". 5775 5776 Following are more examples: 5777 :: 5778 5779 PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/xserver = "xserver-xf86" 5780 PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/libgl ?= "mesa" 5781 5782 For more 5783 information, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:using virtual providers`" 5784 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 5785 5786 .. note:: 5787 5788 If you use a ``virtual/\*`` item with ``PREFERRED_PROVIDER``, then any 5789 recipe that :term:`PROVIDES` that item but is not selected (defined) 5790 by ``PREFERRED_PROVIDER`` is prevented from building, which is usually 5791 desirable since this mechanism is designed to select between mutually 5792 exclusive alternative providers. 5793 5794 :term:`PREFERRED_VERSION` 5795 If multiple versions of recipes exist, this variable determines which 5796 version is given preference. You must always suffix the variable with 5797 the :term:`PN` you want to select, and you should set the 5798 :term:`PV` accordingly for precedence. 5799 5800 The ``PREFERRED_VERSION`` variable supports limited wildcard use 5801 through the "``%``" character. You can use the character to match any 5802 number of characters, which can be useful when specifying versions 5803 that contain long revision numbers that potentially change. Here are 5804 two examples: 5805 :: 5806 5807 PREFERRED_VERSION_python = "3.4.0" 5808 PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto = "5.0%" 5809 5810 .. note:: 5811 5812 The use of the "%" character is limited in that it only works at the end of the 5813 string. You cannot use the wildcard character in any other 5814 location of the string. 5815 5816 The specified version is matched against :term:`PV`, which 5817 does not necessarily match the version part of the recipe's filename. 5818 For example, consider two recipes ``foo_1.2.bb`` and ``foo_git.bb`` 5819 where ``foo_git.bb`` contains the following assignment: 5820 :: 5821 5822 PV = "1.1+git${SRCPV}" 5823 5824 In this case, the correct way to select 5825 ``foo_git.bb`` is by using an assignment such as the following: 5826 :: 5827 5828 PREFERRED_VERSION_foo = "1.1+git%" 5829 5830 Compare that previous example 5831 against the following incorrect example, which does not work: 5832 :: 5833 5834 PREFERRED_VERSION_foo = "git" 5835 5836 Sometimes the ``PREFERRED_VERSION`` variable can be set by 5837 configuration files in a way that is hard to change. You can use 5838 :term:`OVERRIDES` to set a machine-specific 5839 override. Here is an example: 5840 :: 5841 5842 PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto_qemux86 = "5.0%" 5843 5844 Although not recommended, worst case, you can also use the 5845 "forcevariable" override, which is the strongest override possible. 5846 Here is an example: 5847 :: 5848 5849 PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto_forcevariable = "5.0%" 5850 5851 .. note:: 5852 5853 The ``\_forcevariable`` override is not handled specially. This override 5854 only works because the default value of ``OVERRIDES`` includes "forcevariable". 5855 5856 :term:`PREMIRRORS` 5857 Specifies additional paths from which the OpenEmbedded build system 5858 gets source code. When the build system searches for source code, it 5859 first tries the local download directory. If that location fails, the 5860 build system tries locations defined by ``PREMIRRORS``, the upstream 5861 source, and then locations specified by 5862 :term:`MIRRORS` in that order. 5863 5864 Assuming your distribution (:term:`DISTRO`) is "poky", 5865 the default value for ``PREMIRRORS`` is defined in the 5866 ``conf/distro/poky.conf`` file in the ``meta-poky`` Git repository. 5867 5868 Typically, you could add a specific server for the build system to 5869 attempt before any others by adding something like the following to 5870 the ``local.conf`` configuration file in the 5871 :term:`Build Directory`: 5872 :: 5873 5874 PREMIRRORS_prepend = "\ 5875 git://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \ 5876 ftp://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \ 5877 http://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \ 5878 https://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n" 5879 5880 These changes cause the 5881 build system to intercept Git, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS requests and 5882 direct them to the ``http://`` sources mirror. You can use 5883 ``file://`` URLs to point to local directories or network shares as 5884 well. 5885 5886 :term:`PRIORITY` 5887 Indicates the importance of a package. 5888 5889 ``PRIORITY`` is considered to be part of the distribution policy 5890 because the importance of any given recipe depends on the purpose for 5891 which the distribution is being produced. Thus, ``PRIORITY`` is not 5892 normally set within recipes. 5893 5894 You can set ``PRIORITY`` to "required", "standard", "extra", and 5895 "optional", which is the default. 5896 5897 :term:`PRIVATE_LIBS` 5898 Specifies libraries installed within a recipe that should be ignored 5899 by the OpenEmbedded build system's shared library resolver. This 5900 variable is typically used when software being built by a recipe has 5901 its own private versions of a library normally provided by another 5902 recipe. In this case, you would not want the package containing the 5903 private libraries to be set as a dependency on other unrelated 5904 packages that should instead depend on the package providing the 5905 standard version of the library. 5906 5907 Libraries specified in this variable should be specified by their 5908 file name. For example, from the Firefox recipe in meta-browser: 5909 :: 5910 5911 PRIVATE_LIBS = "libmozjs.so \ 5912 libxpcom.so \ 5913 libnspr4.so \ 5914 libxul.so \ 5915 libmozalloc.so \ 5916 libplc4.so \ 5917 libplds4.so" 5918 5919 For more information, see the 5920 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`" 5921 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 5922 5923 :term:`PROVIDES` 5924 A list of aliases by which a particular recipe can be known. By 5925 default, a recipe's own ``PN`` is implicitly already in its 5926 ``PROVIDES`` list and therefore does not need to mention that it 5927 provides itself. If a recipe uses ``PROVIDES``, the additional 5928 aliases are synonyms for the recipe and can be useful for satisfying 5929 dependencies of other recipes during the build as specified by 5930 ``DEPENDS``. 5931 5932 Consider the following example ``PROVIDES`` statement from the recipe 5933 file ``eudev_3.2.9.bb``: 5934 :: 5935 5936 PROVIDES += "udev" 5937 5938 The ``PROVIDES`` statement 5939 results in the "eudev" recipe also being available as simply "udev". 5940 5941 .. note:: 5942 5943 A recipe's own recipe name (:term:`PN`) is always implicitly prepended 5944 to `PROVIDES`, so while using "+=" in the above example may not be 5945 strictly necessary it is recommended to avoid confusion. 5946 5947 In addition to providing recipes under alternate names, the 5948 ``PROVIDES`` mechanism is also used to implement virtual targets. A 5949 virtual target is a name that corresponds to some particular 5950 functionality (e.g. a Linux kernel). Recipes that provide the 5951 functionality in question list the virtual target in ``PROVIDES``. 5952 Recipes that depend on the functionality in question can include the 5953 virtual target in ``DEPENDS`` to leave the choice of provider open. 5954 5955 Conventionally, virtual targets have names on the form 5956 "virtual/function" (e.g. "virtual/kernel"). The slash is simply part 5957 of the name and has no syntactical significance. 5958 5959 The :term:`PREFERRED_PROVIDER` variable is 5960 used to select which particular recipe provides a virtual target. 5961 5962 .. note:: 5963 5964 A corresponding mechanism for virtual runtime dependencies 5965 (packages) exists. However, the mechanism does not depend on any 5966 special functionality beyond ordinary variable assignments. For 5967 example, ``VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager`` refers to the package of 5968 the component that manages the ``/dev`` directory. 5969 5970 Setting the "preferred provider" for runtime dependencies is as 5971 simple as using the following assignment in a configuration file: 5972 :: 5973 5974 VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager = "udev" 5975 5976 5977 :term:`PRSERV_HOST` 5978 The network based :term:`PR` service host and port. 5979 5980 The ``conf/local.conf.sample.extended`` configuration file in the 5981 :term:`Source Directory` shows how the 5982 ``PRSERV_HOST`` variable is set: 5983 :: 5984 5985 PRSERV_HOST = "localhost:0" 5986 5987 You must 5988 set the variable if you want to automatically start a local :ref:`PR 5989 service <dev-manual/common-tasks:working with a pr service>`. You can 5990 set ``PRSERV_HOST`` to other values to use a remote PR service. 5991 5992 5993 :term:`PSEUDO_IGNORE_PATHS` 5994 A comma-separated (without spaces) list of path prefixes that should be ignored 5995 by pseudo when monitoring and recording file operations, in order to avoid 5996 problems with files being written to outside of the pseudo context and 5997 reduce pseudo's overhead. A path is ignored if it matches any prefix in the list 5998 and can include partial directory (or file) names. 5999 6000 6001 :term:`PTEST_ENABLED` 6002 Specifies whether or not :ref:`Package 6003 Test <dev-manual/common-tasks:testing packages with ptest>` (ptest) 6004 functionality is enabled when building a recipe. You should not set 6005 this variable directly. Enabling and disabling building Package Tests 6006 at build time should be done by adding "ptest" to (or removing it 6007 from) :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`. 6008 6009 :term:`PV` 6010 The version of the recipe. The version is normally extracted from the 6011 recipe filename. For example, if the recipe is named 6012 ``expat_2.0.1.bb``, then the default value of ``PV`` will be "2.0.1". 6013 ``PV`` is generally not overridden within a recipe unless it is 6014 building an unstable (i.e. development) version from a source code 6015 repository (e.g. Git or Subversion). 6016 6017 ``PV`` is the default value of the :term:`PKGV` variable. 6018 6019 :term:`PYTHON_ABI` 6020 When used by recipes that inherit the 6021 :ref:`distutils3 <ref-classes-distutils3>`, 6022 :ref:`setuptools3 <ref-classes-setuptools3>`, 6023 :ref:`distutils <ref-classes-distutils>`, or 6024 :ref:`setuptools <ref-classes-setuptools>` classes, denotes the 6025 Application Binary Interface (ABI) currently in use for Python. By 6026 default, the ABI is "m". You do not have to set this variable as the 6027 OpenEmbedded build system sets it for you. 6028 6029 The OpenEmbedded build system uses the ABI to construct directory 6030 names used when installing the Python headers and libraries in 6031 sysroot (e.g. ``.../python3.3m/...``). 6032 6033 Recipes that inherit the ``distutils`` class during cross-builds also 6034 use this variable to locate the headers and libraries of the 6035 appropriate Python that the extension is targeting. 6036 6037 :term:`PYTHON_PN` 6038 When used by recipes that inherit the 6039 `distutils3 <ref-classes-distutils3>`, 6040 :ref:`setuptools3 <ref-classes-setuptools3>`, 6041 :ref:`distutils <ref-classes-distutils>`, or 6042 :ref:`setuptools <ref-classes-setuptools>` classes, specifies the 6043 major Python version being built. For Python 3.x, ``PYTHON_PN`` would 6044 be "python3". You do not have to set this variable as the 6045 OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets it for you. 6046 6047 The variable allows recipes to use common infrastructure such as the 6048 following: 6049 :: 6050 6051 DEPENDS += "${PYTHON_PN}-native" 6052 6053 In the previous example, 6054 the version of the dependency is ``PYTHON_PN``. 6055 6056 :term:`RANLIB` 6057 The minimal command and arguments to run ``ranlib``. 6058 6059 :term:`RCONFLICTS` 6060 The list of packages that conflict with packages. Note that packages 6061 will not be installed if conflicting packages are not first removed. 6062 6063 Like all package-controlling variables, you must always use them in 6064 conjunction with a package name override. Here is an example: 6065 :: 6066 6067 RCONFLICTS_${PN} = "another_conflicting_package_name" 6068 6069 BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports 6070 specifying versioned dependencies. Although the syntax varies 6071 depending on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences 6072 from you. Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the 6073 ``RCONFLICTS`` variable: 6074 :: 6075 6076 RCONFLICTS_${PN} = "package (operator version)" 6077 6078 For ``operator``, you can specify the following: 6079 6080 - = 6081 - < 6082 - > 6083 - <= 6084 - >= 6085 6086 For example, the following sets up a dependency on version 1.2 or 6087 greater of the package ``foo``: 6088 :: 6089 6090 RCONFLICTS_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)" 6091 6092 :term:`RDEPENDS` 6093 Lists runtime dependencies of a package. These dependencies are other 6094 packages that must be installed in order for the package to function 6095 correctly. As an example, the following assignment declares that the 6096 package ``foo`` needs the packages ``bar`` and ``baz`` to be 6097 installed: 6098 :: 6099 6100 RDEPENDS_foo = "bar baz" 6101 6102 The most common types of package 6103 runtime dependencies are automatically detected and added. Therefore, 6104 most recipes do not need to set ``RDEPENDS``. For more information, 6105 see the 6106 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`" 6107 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 6108 6109 The practical effect of the above ``RDEPENDS`` assignment is that 6110 ``bar`` and ``baz`` will be declared as dependencies inside the 6111 package ``foo`` when it is written out by one of the 6112 :ref:`do_package_write_\* <ref-tasks-package_write_deb>` tasks. 6113 Exactly how this is done depends on which package format is used, 6114 which is determined by 6115 :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES`. When the 6116 corresponding package manager installs the package, it will know to 6117 also install the packages on which it depends. 6118 6119 To ensure that the packages ``bar`` and ``baz`` get built, the 6120 previous ``RDEPENDS`` assignment also causes a task dependency to be 6121 added. This dependency is from the recipe's 6122 :ref:`ref-tasks-build` (not to be confused with 6123 :ref:`ref-tasks-compile`) task to the 6124 ``do_package_write_*`` task of the recipes that build ``bar`` and 6125 ``baz``. 6126 6127 The names of the packages you list within ``RDEPENDS`` must be the 6128 names of other packages - they cannot be recipe names. Although 6129 package names and recipe names usually match, the important point 6130 here is that you are providing package names within the ``RDEPENDS`` 6131 variable. For an example of the default list of packages created from 6132 a recipe, see the :term:`PACKAGES` variable. 6133 6134 Because the ``RDEPENDS`` variable applies to packages being built, 6135 you should always use the variable in a form with an attached package 6136 name (remember that a single recipe can build multiple packages). For 6137 example, suppose you are building a development package that depends 6138 on the ``perl`` package. In this case, you would use the following 6139 ``RDEPENDS`` statement: 6140 :: 6141 6142 RDEPENDS_${PN}-dev += "perl" 6143 6144 In the example, 6145 the development package depends on the ``perl`` package. Thus, the 6146 ``RDEPENDS`` variable has the ``${PN}-dev`` package name as part of 6147 the variable. 6148 6149 .. note:: 6150 6151 ``RDEPENDS_${PN}-dev`` includes ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}`` 6152 by default. This default is set in the BitBake configuration file 6153 (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``). Be careful not to accidentally remove 6154 ``${PN}`` when modifying ``RDEPENDS_${PN}-dev``. Use the "+=" operator 6155 rather than the "=" operator. 6156 6157 The package names you use with ``RDEPENDS`` must appear as they would 6158 in the ``PACKAGES`` variable. The :term:`PKG` variable 6159 allows a different name to be used for the final package (e.g. the 6160 :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class uses this to rename 6161 packages), but this final package name cannot be used with 6162 ``RDEPENDS``, which makes sense as ``RDEPENDS`` is meant to be 6163 independent of the package format used. 6164 6165 BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports 6166 specifying versioned dependencies. Although the syntax varies 6167 depending on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences 6168 from you. Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the 6169 ``RDEPENDS`` variable: 6170 :: 6171 6172 RDEPENDS_${PN} = "package (operator version)" 6173 6174 For ``operator``, you can specify the following: 6175 6176 - = 6177 - < 6178 - > 6179 - <= 6180 - >= 6181 6182 For version, provide the version number. 6183 6184 .. note:: 6185 6186 You can use ``EXTENDPKGV`` to provide a full package version 6187 specification. 6188 6189 For example, the following sets up a dependency on version 1.2 or 6190 greater of the package ``foo``: 6191 :: 6192 6193 RDEPENDS_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)" 6194 6195 For information on build-time dependencies, see the 6196 :term:`DEPENDS` variable. You can also see the 6197 ":ref:`Tasks <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:tasks>`" and 6198 ":ref:`Dependencies <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-execution:dependencies>`" sections in the 6199 BitBake User Manual for additional information on tasks and 6200 dependencies. 6201 6202 :term:`REQUIRED_DISTRO_FEATURES` 6203 When inheriting the 6204 :ref:`features_check <ref-classes-features_check>` 6205 class, this variable identifies distribution features that must exist 6206 in the current configuration in order for the OpenEmbedded build 6207 system to build the recipe. In other words, if the 6208 ``REQUIRED_DISTRO_FEATURES`` variable lists a feature that does not 6209 appear in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` within the current configuration, then 6210 the recipe will be skipped, and if the build system attempts to build 6211 the recipe then an error will be triggered. 6212 6213 :term:`RM_WORK_EXCLUDE` 6214 With ``rm_work`` enabled, this variable specifies a list of recipes 6215 whose work directories should not be removed. See the 6216 ":ref:`rm_work.bbclass <ref-classes-rm-work>`" section for more 6217 details. 6218 6219 :term:`ROOT_HOME` 6220 Defines the root home directory. By default, this directory is set as 6221 follows in the BitBake configuration file: 6222 :: 6223 6224 ROOT_HOME ??= "/home/root" 6225 6226 .. note:: 6227 6228 This default value is likely used because some embedded solutions 6229 prefer to have a read-only root filesystem and prefer to keep 6230 writeable data in one place. 6231 6232 You can override the default by setting the variable in any layer or 6233 in the ``local.conf`` file. Because the default is set using a "weak" 6234 assignment (i.e. "??="), you can use either of the following forms to 6235 define your override: 6236 :: 6237 6238 ROOT_HOME = "/root" 6239 ROOT_HOME ?= "/root" 6240 6241 These 6242 override examples use ``/root``, which is probably the most commonly 6243 used override. 6244 6245 :term:`ROOTFS` 6246 Indicates a filesystem image to include as the root filesystem. 6247 6248 The ``ROOTFS`` variable is an optional variable used with the 6249 :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class. 6250 6251 :term:`ROOTFS_POSTINSTALL_COMMAND` 6252 Specifies a list of functions to call after the OpenEmbedded build 6253 system has installed packages. You can specify functions separated by 6254 semicolons: 6255 :: 6256 6257 ROOTFS_POSTINSTALL_COMMAND += "function; ... " 6258 6259 If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a 6260 function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the 6261 directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the 6262 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more 6263 information. 6264 6265 :term:`ROOTFS_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND` 6266 Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build 6267 system has created the root filesystem. You can specify functions 6268 separated by semicolons: 6269 :: 6270 6271 ROOTFS_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... " 6272 6273 If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a 6274 function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the 6275 directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the 6276 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more 6277 information. 6278 6279 :term:`ROOTFS_POSTUNINSTALL_COMMAND` 6280 Specifies a list of functions to call after the OpenEmbedded build 6281 system has removed unnecessary packages. When runtime package 6282 management is disabled in the image, several packages are removed 6283 including ``base-passwd``, ``shadow``, and ``update-alternatives``. 6284 You can specify functions separated by semicolons: 6285 :: 6286 6287 ROOTFS_POSTUNINSTALL_COMMAND += "function; ... " 6288 6289 If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a 6290 function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the 6291 directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the 6292 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more 6293 information. 6294 6295 :term:`ROOTFS_PREPROCESS_COMMAND` 6296 Specifies a list of functions to call before the OpenEmbedded build 6297 system has created the root filesystem. You can specify functions 6298 separated by semicolons: 6299 :: 6300 6301 ROOTFS_PREPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... " 6302 6303 If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a 6304 function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the 6305 directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the 6306 :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more 6307 information. 6308 6309 :term:`RPROVIDES` 6310 A list of package name aliases that a package also provides. These 6311 aliases are useful for satisfying runtime dependencies of other 6312 packages both during the build and on the target (as specified by 6313 ``RDEPENDS``). 6314 6315 .. note:: 6316 6317 A package's own name is implicitly already in its ``RPROVIDES`` list. 6318 6319 As with all package-controlling variables, you must always use the 6320 variable in conjunction with a package name override. Here is an 6321 example: 6322 :: 6323 6324 RPROVIDES_${PN} = "widget-abi-2" 6325 6326 :term:`RRECOMMENDS` 6327 A list of packages that extends the usability of a package being 6328 built. The package being built does not depend on this list of 6329 packages in order to successfully build, but rather uses them for 6330 extended usability. To specify runtime dependencies for packages, see 6331 the ``RDEPENDS`` variable. 6332 6333 The package manager will automatically install the ``RRECOMMENDS`` 6334 list of packages when installing the built package. However, you can 6335 prevent listed packages from being installed by using the 6336 :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS`, 6337 :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS`, and 6338 :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE` variables. 6339 6340 Packages specified in ``RRECOMMENDS`` need not actually be produced. 6341 However, a recipe must exist that provides each package, either 6342 through the :term:`PACKAGES` or 6343 :term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC` variables or the 6344 :term:`RPROVIDES` variable, or an error will occur 6345 during the build. If such a recipe does exist and the package is not 6346 produced, the build continues without error. 6347 6348 Because the ``RRECOMMENDS`` variable applies to packages being built, 6349 you should always attach an override to the variable to specify the 6350 particular package whose usability is being extended. For example, 6351 suppose you are building a development package that is extended to 6352 support wireless functionality. In this case, you would use the 6353 following: 6354 :: 6355 6356 RRECOMMENDS_${PN}-dev += "wireless_package_name" 6357 6358 In the 6359 example, the package name (``${PN}-dev``) must appear as it would in 6360 the ``PACKAGES`` namespace before any renaming of the output package 6361 by classes such as ``debian.bbclass``. 6362 6363 BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports 6364 specifying versioned recommends. Although the syntax varies depending 6365 on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences from you. 6366 Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the 6367 ``RRECOMMENDS`` variable: 6368 :: 6369 6370 RRECOMMENDS_${PN} = "package (operator version)" 6371 6372 For ``operator``, you can specify the following: 6373 6374 - = 6375 - < 6376 - > 6377 - <= 6378 - >= 6379 6380 For example, the following sets up a recommend on version 1.2 or 6381 greater of the package ``foo``: 6382 :: 6383 6384 RRECOMMENDS_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)" 6385 6386 :term:`RREPLACES` 6387 A list of packages replaced by a package. The package manager uses 6388 this variable to determine which package should be installed to 6389 replace other package(s) during an upgrade. In order to also have the 6390 other package(s) removed at the same time, you must add the name of 6391 the other package to the ``RCONFLICTS`` variable. 6392 6393 As with all package-controlling variables, you must use this variable 6394 in conjunction with a package name override. Here is an example: 6395 :: 6396 6397 RREPLACES_${PN} = "other_package_being_replaced" 6398 6399 BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports 6400 specifying versioned replacements. Although the syntax varies 6401 depending on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences 6402 from you. Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the 6403 ``RREPLACES`` variable: 6404 :: 6405 6406 RREPLACES_${PN} = "package (operator version)" 6407 6408 For ``operator``, you can specify the following: 6409 6410 - = 6411 - < 6412 - > 6413 - <= 6414 - >= 6415 6416 For example, the following sets up a replacement using version 1.2 6417 or greater of the package ``foo``: 6418 :: 6419 6420 RREPLACES_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)" 6421 6422 :term:`RSUGGESTS` 6423 A list of additional packages that you can suggest for installation 6424 by the package manager at the time a package is installed. Not all 6425 package managers support this functionality. 6426 6427 As with all package-controlling variables, you must always use this 6428 variable in conjunction with a package name override. Here is an 6429 example: 6430 :: 6431 6432 RSUGGESTS_${PN} = "useful_package another_package" 6433 6434 :term:`S` 6435 The location in the :term:`Build Directory` where 6436 unpacked recipe source code resides. By default, this directory is 6437 ``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}/${``\ :term:`BPN`\ ``}-${``\ :term:`PV`\ ``}``, 6438 where ``${BPN}`` is the base recipe name and ``${PV}`` is the recipe 6439 version. If the source tarball extracts the code to a directory named 6440 anything other than ``${BPN}-${PV}``, or if the source code is 6441 fetched from an SCM such as Git or Subversion, then you must set 6442 ``S`` in the recipe so that the OpenEmbedded build system knows where 6443 to find the unpacked source. 6444 6445 As an example, assume a :term:`Source Directory` 6446 top-level folder named ``poky`` and a default Build Directory at 6447 ``poky/build``. In this case, the work directory the build system 6448 uses to keep the unpacked recipe for ``db`` is the following: 6449 :: 6450 6451 poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/db/5.1.19-r3/db-5.1.19 6452 6453 The unpacked source code resides in the ``db-5.1.19`` folder. 6454 6455 This next example assumes a Git repository. By default, Git 6456 repositories are cloned to ``${WORKDIR}/git`` during 6457 :ref:`ref-tasks-fetch`. Since this path is different 6458 from the default value of ``S``, you must set it specifically so the 6459 source can be located: 6460 :: 6461 6462 SRC_URI = "git://path/to/repo.git" 6463 S = "${WORKDIR}/git" 6464 6465 :term:`SANITY_REQUIRED_UTILITIES` 6466 Specifies a list of command-line utilities that should be checked for 6467 during the initial sanity checking process when running BitBake. If 6468 any of the utilities are not installed on the build host, then 6469 BitBake immediately exits with an error. 6470 6471 :term:`SANITY_TESTED_DISTROS` 6472 A list of the host distribution identifiers that the build system has 6473 been tested against. Identifiers consist of the host distributor ID 6474 followed by the release, as reported by the ``lsb_release`` tool or 6475 as read from ``/etc/lsb-release``. Separate the list items with 6476 explicit newline characters (``\n``). If ``SANITY_TESTED_DISTROS`` is 6477 not empty and the current value of 6478 :term:`NATIVELSBSTRING` does not appear in the 6479 list, then the build system reports a warning that indicates the 6480 current host distribution has not been tested as a build host. 6481 6482 :term:`SDK_ARCH` 6483 The target architecture for the SDK. Typically, you do not directly 6484 set this variable. Instead, use :term:`SDKMACHINE`. 6485 6486 :term:`SDK_DEPLOY` 6487 The directory set up and used by the 6488 :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk>` class to which 6489 the SDK is deployed. The ``populate_sdk_base`` class defines 6490 ``SDK_DEPLOY`` as follows: 6491 :: 6492 6493 SDK_DEPLOY = "${TMPDIR}/deploy/sdk" 6494 6495 :term:`SDK_DIR` 6496 The parent directory used by the OpenEmbedded build system when 6497 creating SDK output. The 6498 :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class defines 6499 the variable as follows: 6500 :: 6501 6502 SDK_DIR = "${WORKDIR}/sdk" 6503 6504 .. note:: 6505 6506 The ``SDK_DIR`` directory is a temporary directory as it is part of 6507 ``WORKDIR``. The final output directory is :term:`SDK_DEPLOY`. 6508 6509 :term:`SDK_EXT_TYPE` 6510 Controls whether or not shared state artifacts are copied into the 6511 extensible SDK. The default value of "full" copies all of the 6512 required shared state artifacts into the extensible SDK. The value 6513 "minimal" leaves these artifacts out of the SDK. 6514 6515 .. note:: 6516 6517 If you set the variable to "minimal", you need to ensure 6518 :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS` is set in the SDK's configuration to enable the 6519 artifacts to be fetched as needed. 6520 6521 :term:`SDK_HOST_MANIFEST` 6522 The manifest file for the host part of the SDK. This file lists all 6523 the installed packages that make up the host part of the SDK. The 6524 file contains package information on a line-per-package basis as 6525 follows: 6526 :: 6527 6528 packagename packagearch version 6529 6530 The :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class 6531 defines the manifest file as follows: 6532 :: 6533 6534 SDK_HOST_MANIFEST = "${SDK_DEPLOY}/${TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME}.host.manifest" 6535 6536 The location is derived using the :term:`SDK_DEPLOY` and 6537 :term:`TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME` variables. 6538 6539 :term:`SDK_INCLUDE_PKGDATA` 6540 When set to "1", specifies to include the packagedata for all recipes 6541 in the "world" target in the extensible SDK. Including this data 6542 allows the ``devtool search`` command to find these recipes in search 6543 results, as well as allows the ``devtool add`` command to map 6544 dependencies more effectively. 6545 6546 .. note:: 6547 6548 Enabling the ``SDK_INCLUDE_PKGDATA`` 6549 variable significantly increases build time because all of world 6550 needs to be built. Enabling the variable also slightly increases 6551 the size of the extensible SDK. 6552 6553 :term:`SDK_INCLUDE_TOOLCHAIN` 6554 When set to "1", specifies to include the toolchain in the extensible 6555 SDK. Including the toolchain is useful particularly when 6556 :term:`SDK_EXT_TYPE` is set to "minimal" to keep 6557 the SDK reasonably small but you still want to provide a usable 6558 toolchain. For example, suppose you want to use the toolchain from an 6559 IDE or from other tools and you do not want to perform additional 6560 steps to install the toolchain. 6561 6562 The ``SDK_INCLUDE_TOOLCHAIN`` variable defaults to "0" if 6563 ``SDK_EXT_TYPE`` is set to "minimal", and defaults to "1" if 6564 ``SDK_EXT_TYPE`` is set to "full". 6565 6566 :term:`SDK_INHERIT_BLACKLIST` 6567 A list of classes to remove from the :term:`INHERIT` 6568 value globally within the extensible SDK configuration. The 6569 :ref:`populate-sdk-ext <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class sets the 6570 default value: 6571 :: 6572 6573 SDK_INHERIT_BLACKLIST ?= "buildhistory icecc" 6574 6575 Some classes are not generally applicable within the extensible SDK 6576 context. You can use this variable to disable those classes. 6577 6578 For additional information on how to customize the extensible SDK's 6579 configuration, see the 6580 ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:configuring the extensible sdk`" 6581 section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the 6582 Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual. 6583 6584 :term:`SDK_LOCAL_CONF_BLACKLIST` 6585 A list of variables not allowed through from the OpenEmbedded build 6586 system configuration into the extensible SDK configuration. Usually, 6587 these are variables that are specific to the machine on which the 6588 build system is running and thus would be potentially problematic 6589 within the extensible SDK. 6590 6591 By default, ``SDK_LOCAL_CONF_BLACKLIST`` is set in the 6592 :ref:`populate-sdk-ext <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class and 6593 excludes the following variables: 6594 6595 - :term:`CONF_VERSION` 6596 - :term:`BB_NUMBER_THREADS` 6597 - :term:`bitbake:BB_NUMBER_PARSE_THREADS` 6598 - :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` 6599 - :term:`PRSERV_HOST` 6600 - :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS` :term:`DL_DIR` 6601 - :term:`SSTATE_DIR` :term:`TMPDIR` 6602 - :term:`BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT` 6603 6604 For additional information on how to customize the extensible SDK's 6605 configuration, see the 6606 ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:configuring the extensible sdk`" 6607 section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the 6608 Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual. 6609 6610 :term:`SDK_LOCAL_CONF_WHITELIST` 6611 A list of variables allowed through from the OpenEmbedded build 6612 system configuration into the extensible SDK configuration. By 6613 default, the list of variables is empty and is set in the 6614 :ref:`populate-sdk-ext <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class. 6615 6616 This list overrides the variables specified using the 6617 :term:`SDK_LOCAL_CONF_BLACKLIST` 6618 variable as well as any variables identified by automatic 6619 blacklisting due to the "/" character being found at the start of the 6620 value, which is usually indicative of being a path and thus might not 6621 be valid on the system where the SDK is installed. 6622 6623 For additional information on how to customize the extensible SDK's 6624 configuration, see the 6625 ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:configuring the extensible sdk`" 6626 section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the 6627 Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual. 6628 6629 :term:`SDK_NAME` 6630 The base name for SDK output files. The name is derived from the 6631 :term:`DISTRO`, :term:`TCLIBC`, 6632 :term:`SDK_ARCH`, 6633 :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME`, and 6634 :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH` variables: 6635 :: 6636 6637 SDK_NAME = "${DISTRO}-${TCLIBC}-${SDK_ARCH}-${IMAGE_BASENAME}-${TUNE_PKGARCH}" 6638 6639 :term:`SDK_OS` 6640 Specifies the operating system for which the SDK will be built. The 6641 default value is the value of :term:`BUILD_OS`. 6642 6643 :term:`SDK_OUTPUT` 6644 The location used by the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK 6645 output. The :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` 6646 class defines the variable as follows: 6647 :: 6648 6649 SDK_DIR = "${WORKDIR}/sdk" 6650 SDK_OUTPUT = "${SDK_DIR}/image" 6651 SDK_DEPLOY = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/sdk" 6652 6653 .. note:: 6654 6655 The ``SDK_OUTPUT`` directory is a temporary directory as it is part of 6656 :term:`WORKDIR` by way of :term:`SDK_DIR`. The final output directory is 6657 :term:`SDK_DEPLOY`. 6658 6659 :term:`SDK_PACKAGE_ARCHS` 6660 Specifies a list of architectures compatible with the SDK machine. 6661 This variable is set automatically and should not normally be 6662 hand-edited. Entries are separated using spaces and listed in order 6663 of priority. The default value for ``SDK_PACKAGE_ARCHS`` is "all any 6664 noarch ${SDK_ARCH}-${SDKPKGSUFFIX}". 6665 6666 :term:`SDK_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND` 6667 Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build 6668 system creates the SDK. You can specify functions separated by 6669 semicolons: SDK_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... " 6670 6671 If you need to pass an SDK path to a command within a function, you 6672 can use ``${SDK_DIR}``, which points to the parent directory used by 6673 the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK output. See the 6674 :term:`SDK_DIR` variable for more information. 6675 6676 :term:`SDK_PREFIX` 6677 The toolchain binary prefix used for ``nativesdk`` recipes. The 6678 OpenEmbedded build system uses the ``SDK_PREFIX`` value to set the 6679 :term:`TARGET_PREFIX` when building 6680 ``nativesdk`` recipes. The default value is "${SDK_SYS}-". 6681 6682 :term:`SDK_RECRDEP_TASKS` 6683 A list of shared state tasks added to the extensible SDK. By default, 6684 the following tasks are added: 6685 6686 - do_populate_lic 6687 - do_package_qa 6688 - do_populate_sysroot 6689 - do_deploy 6690 6691 Despite the default value of "" for the 6692 ``SDK_RECRDEP_TASKS`` variable, the above four tasks are always added 6693 to the SDK. To specify tasks beyond these four, you need to use the 6694 ``SDK_RECRDEP_TASKS`` variable (e.g. you are defining additional 6695 tasks that are needed in order to build 6696 :term:`SDK_TARGETS`). 6697 6698 :term:`SDK_SYS` 6699 Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating 6700 system, for which the SDK will be built. 6701 6702 The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based 6703 on :term:`SDK_ARCH`, 6704 :term:`SDK_VENDOR`, and 6705 :term:`SDK_OS`. You do not need to set the ``SDK_SYS`` 6706 variable yourself. 6707 6708 :term:`SDK_TARGET_MANIFEST` 6709 The manifest file for the target part of the SDK. This file lists all 6710 the installed packages that make up the target part of the SDK. The 6711 file contains package information on a line-per-package basis as 6712 follows: 6713 :: 6714 6715 packagename packagearch version 6716 6717 The :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class 6718 defines the manifest file as follows: 6719 :: 6720 6721 SDK_TARGET_MANIFEST = "${SDK_DEPLOY}/${TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME}.target.manifest" 6722 6723 The location is derived using the :term:`SDK_DEPLOY` and 6724 :term:`TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME` variables. 6725 6726 :term:`SDK_TARGETS` 6727 A list of targets to install from shared state as part of the 6728 standard or extensible SDK installation. The default value is "${PN}" 6729 (i.e. the image from which the SDK is built). 6730 6731 The ``SDK_TARGETS`` variable is an internal variable and typically 6732 would not be changed. 6733 6734 :term:`SDK_TITLE` 6735 The title to be printed when running the SDK installer. By default, 6736 this title is based on the :term:`DISTRO_NAME` or 6737 :term:`DISTRO` variable and is set in the 6738 :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class as 6739 follows: 6740 :: 6741 6742 SDK_TITLE ??= "${@d.getVar('DISTRO_NAME') or d.getVar('DISTRO')} SDK" 6743 6744 For the default distribution "poky", 6745 ``SDK_TITLE`` is set to "Poky (Yocto Project Reference Distro)". 6746 6747 For information on how to change this default title, see the 6748 ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:changing the extensible sdk installer title`" 6749 section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the 6750 Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual. 6751 6752 :term:`SDK_UPDATE_URL` 6753 An optional URL for an update server for the extensible SDK. If set, 6754 the value is used as the default update server when running 6755 ``devtool sdk-update`` within the extensible SDK. 6756 6757 :term:`SDK_VENDOR` 6758 Specifies the name of the SDK vendor. 6759 6760 :term:`SDK_VERSION` 6761 Specifies the version of the SDK. The distribution configuration file 6762 (e.g. ``/meta-poky/conf/distro/poky.conf``) defines the 6763 ``SDK_VERSION`` as follows: 6764 :: 6765 6766 SDK_VERSION = "${@d.getVar('DISTRO_VERSION').replace('snapshot-${DATE}','snapshot')}" 6767 6768 For additional information, see the 6769 :term:`DISTRO_VERSION` and 6770 :term:`DATE` variables. 6771 6772 :term:`SDKEXTPATH` 6773 The default installation directory for the Extensible SDK. By 6774 default, this directory is based on the :term:`DISTRO` 6775 variable and is set in the 6776 :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class as 6777 follows: 6778 :: 6779 6780 SDKEXTPATH ??= "~/${@d.getVar('DISTRO')}_sdk" 6781 6782 For the 6783 default distribution "poky", the ``SDKEXTPATH`` is set to "poky_sdk". 6784 6785 For information on how to change this default directory, see the 6786 ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:changing the default sdk installation directory`" 6787 section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the 6788 Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual. 6789 6790 :term:`SDKIMAGE_FEATURES` 6791 Equivalent to ``IMAGE_FEATURES``. However, this variable applies to 6792 the SDK generated from an image using the following command: 6793 :: 6794 6795 $ bitbake -c populate_sdk imagename 6796 6797 :term:`SDKMACHINE` 6798 The machine for which the SDK is built. In other words, the SDK is 6799 built such that it runs on the target you specify with the 6800 ``SDKMACHINE`` value. The value points to a corresponding ``.conf`` 6801 file under ``conf/machine-sdk/``. 6802 6803 You can use "i686" and "x86_64" as possible values for this variable. 6804 The variable defaults to "i686" and is set in the local.conf file in 6805 the Build Directory. 6806 :: 6807 6808 SDKMACHINE ?= "i686" 6809 6810 .. note:: 6811 6812 You cannot set the ``SDKMACHINE`` 6813 variable in your distribution configuration file. If you do, the 6814 configuration will not take affect. 6815 6816 :term:`SDKPATH` 6817 Defines the path offered to the user for installation of the SDK that 6818 is generated by the OpenEmbedded build system. The path appears as 6819 the default location for installing the SDK when you run the SDK's 6820 installation script. You can override the offered path when you run 6821 the script. 6822 6823 :term:`SDKTARGETSYSROOT` 6824 The full path to the sysroot used for cross-compilation within an SDK 6825 as it will be when installed into the default 6826 :term:`SDKPATH`. 6827 6828 :term:`SECTION` 6829 The section in which packages should be categorized. Package 6830 management utilities can make use of this variable. 6831 6832 :term:`SELECTED_OPTIMIZATION` 6833 Specifies the optimization flags passed to the C compiler when 6834 building for the target. The flags are passed through the default 6835 value of the :term:`TARGET_CFLAGS` variable. 6836 6837 The ``SELECTED_OPTIMIZATION`` variable takes the value of 6838 ``FULL_OPTIMIZATION`` unless ``DEBUG_BUILD`` = "1". If that is the 6839 case, the value of ``DEBUG_OPTIMIZATION`` is used. 6840 6841 :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLE` 6842 Defines a serial console (TTY) to enable using 6843 `getty <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_(Unix)>`__. Provide a 6844 value that specifies the baud rate followed by the TTY device name 6845 separated by a space. You cannot specify more than one TTY device: 6846 :: 6847 6848 SERIAL_CONSOLE = "115200 ttyS0" 6849 6850 .. note:: 6851 6852 The ``SERIAL_CONSOLE`` variable is deprecated. Please use the 6853 :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES` variable. 6854 6855 :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES` 6856 Defines a serial console (TTY) to enable using 6857 `getty <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_(Unix)>`__. Provide a 6858 value that specifies the baud rate followed by the TTY device name 6859 separated by a semicolon. Use spaces to separate multiple devices: 6860 :: 6861 6862 SERIAL_CONSOLES = "115200;ttyS0 115200;ttyS1" 6863 6864 :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES_CHECK` 6865 Specifies serial consoles, which must be listed in 6866 :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES`, to check against 6867 ``/proc/console`` before enabling them using getty. This variable 6868 allows aliasing in the format: <device>:<alias>. If a device was 6869 listed as "sclp_line0" in ``/dev/`` and "ttyS0" was listed in 6870 ``/proc/console``, you would do the following: :: 6871 6872 SERIAL_CONSOLES_CHECK = "slcp_line0:ttyS0" 6873 6874 This variable is currently only supported with SysVinit (i.e. not 6875 with systemd). 6876 6877 :term:`SIGGEN_EXCLUDE_SAFE_RECIPE_DEPS` 6878 A list of recipe dependencies that should not be used to determine 6879 signatures of tasks from one recipe when they depend on tasks from 6880 another recipe. For example: :: 6881 6882 SIGGEN_EXCLUDE_SAFE_RECIPE_DEPS += "intone->mplayer2" 6883 6884 In the previous example, ``intone`` depends on ``mplayer2``. 6885 6886 You can use the special token ``"*"`` on the left-hand side of the 6887 dependency to match all recipes except the one on the right-hand 6888 side. Here is an example: :: 6889 6890 SIGGEN_EXCLUDE_SAFE_RECIPE_DEPS += "*->quilt-native" 6891 6892 In the previous example, all recipes except ``quilt-native`` ignore 6893 task signatures from the ``quilt-native`` recipe when determining 6894 their task signatures. 6895 6896 Use of this variable is one mechanism to remove dependencies that 6897 affect task signatures and thus force rebuilds when a recipe changes. 6898 6899 .. note:: 6900 6901 If you add an inappropriate dependency for a recipe relationship, 6902 the software might break during runtime if the interface of the 6903 second recipe was changed after the first recipe had been built. 6904 6905 :term:`SIGGEN_EXCLUDERECIPES_ABISAFE` 6906 A list of recipes that are completely stable and will never change. 6907 The ABI for the recipes in the list are presented by output from the 6908 tasks run to build the recipe. Use of this variable is one way to 6909 remove dependencies from one recipe on another that affect task 6910 signatures and thus force rebuilds when the recipe changes. 6911 6912 .. note:: 6913 6914 If you add an inappropriate variable to this list, the software 6915 might break at runtime if the interface of the recipe was changed 6916 after the other had been built. 6917 6918 :term:`SITEINFO_BITS` 6919 Specifies the number of bits for the target system CPU. The value 6920 should be either "32" or "64". 6921 6922 :term:`SITEINFO_ENDIANNESS` 6923 Specifies the endian byte order of the target system. The value 6924 should be either "le" for little-endian or "be" for big-endian. 6925 6926 :term:`SKIP_FILEDEPS` 6927 Enables removal of all files from the "Provides" section of an RPM 6928 package. Removal of these files is required for packages containing 6929 prebuilt binaries and libraries such as ``libstdc++`` and ``glibc``. 6930 6931 To enable file removal, set the variable to "1" in your 6932 ``conf/local.conf`` configuration file in your: 6933 :term:`Build Directory`. 6934 :: 6935 6936 SKIP_FILEDEPS = "1" 6937 6938 :term:`SOC_FAMILY` 6939 Groups together machines based upon the same family of SOC (System On 6940 Chip). You typically set this variable in a common ``.inc`` file that 6941 you include in the configuration files of all the machines. 6942 6943 .. note:: 6944 6945 You must include ``conf/machine/include/soc-family.inc`` for this 6946 variable to appear in :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES`. 6947 6948 :term:`SOLIBS` 6949 Defines the suffix for shared libraries used on the target platform. 6950 By default, this suffix is ".so.*" for all Linux-based systems and is 6951 defined in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file. 6952 6953 You will see this variable referenced in the default values of 6954 ``FILES_${PN}``. 6955 6956 :term:`SOLIBSDEV` 6957 Defines the suffix for the development symbolic link (symlink) for 6958 shared libraries on the target platform. By default, this suffix is 6959 ".so" for Linux-based systems and is defined in the 6960 ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file. 6961 6962 You will see this variable referenced in the default values of 6963 ``FILES_${PN}-dev``. 6964 6965 :term:`SOURCE_MIRROR_FETCH` 6966 When you are fetching files to create a mirror of sources (i.e. 6967 creating a source mirror), setting ``SOURCE_MIRROR_FETCH`` to "1" in 6968 your ``local.conf`` configuration file ensures the source for all 6969 recipes are fetched regardless of whether or not a recipe is 6970 compatible with the configuration. A recipe is considered 6971 incompatible with the currently configured machine when either or 6972 both the :term:`COMPATIBLE_MACHINE` 6973 variable and :term:`COMPATIBLE_HOST` variables 6974 specify compatibility with a machine other than that of the current 6975 machine or host. 6976 6977 .. note:: 6978 6979 Do not set the ``SOURCE_MIRROR_FETCH`` 6980 variable unless you are creating a source mirror. In other words, 6981 do not set the variable during a normal build. 6982 6983 :term:`SOURCE_MIRROR_URL` 6984 Defines your own :term:`PREMIRRORS` from which to 6985 first fetch source before attempting to fetch from the upstream 6986 specified in :term:`SRC_URI`. 6987 6988 To use this variable, you must globally inherit the 6989 :ref:`own-mirrors <ref-classes-own-mirrors>` class and then provide 6990 the URL to your mirrors. Here is the general syntax: 6991 :: 6992 6993 INHERIT += "own-mirrors" 6994 SOURCE_MIRROR_URL = "http://example.com/my_source_mirror" 6995 6996 .. note:: 6997 6998 You can specify only a single URL in ``SOURCE_MIRROR_URL``. 6999 7000 :term:`SPDXLICENSEMAP` 7001 Maps commonly used license names to their SPDX counterparts found in 7002 ``meta/files/common-licenses/``. For the default ``SPDXLICENSEMAP`` 7003 mappings, see the ``meta/conf/licenses.conf`` file. 7004 7005 For additional information, see the :term:`LICENSE` 7006 variable. 7007 7008 :term:`SPECIAL_PKGSUFFIX` 7009 A list of prefixes for :term:`PN` used by the OpenEmbedded 7010 build system to create variants of recipes or packages. The list 7011 specifies the prefixes to strip off during certain circumstances such 7012 as the generation of the :term:`BPN` variable. 7013 7014 :term:`SPL_BINARY` 7015 The file type for the Secondary Program Loader (SPL). Some devices 7016 use an SPL from which to boot (e.g. the BeagleBone development 7017 board). For such cases, you can declare the file type of the SPL 7018 binary in the ``u-boot.inc`` include file, which is used in the 7019 U-Boot recipe. 7020 7021 The SPL file type is set to "null" by default in the ``u-boot.inc`` 7022 file as follows: 7023 :: 7024 7025 # Some versions of u-boot build an SPL (Second Program Loader) image that 7026 # should be packaged along with the u-boot binary as well as placed in the 7027 # deploy directory. For those versions they can set the following variables 7028 # to allow packaging the SPL. 7029 SPL_BINARY ?= "" 7030 SPL_BINARYNAME ?= "${@os.path.basename(d.getVar("SPL_BINARY"))}" 7031 SPL_IMAGE ?= "${SPL_BINARYNAME}-${MACHINE}-${PV}-${PR}" 7032 SPL_SYMLINK ?= "${SPL_BINARYNAME}-${MACHINE}" 7033 7034 The ``SPL_BINARY`` variable helps form 7035 various ``SPL_*`` variables used by the OpenEmbedded build system. 7036 7037 See the BeagleBone machine configuration example in the 7038 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:adding a layer using the \`\`bitbake-layers\`\` script`" 7039 section in the Yocto Project Board Support Package Developer's Guide 7040 for additional information. 7041 7042 :term:`SRC_URI` 7043 The list of source files - local or remote. This variable tells the 7044 OpenEmbedded build system which bits to pull in for the build and how 7045 to pull them in. For example, if the recipe or append file only needs 7046 to fetch a tarball from the Internet, the recipe or append file uses 7047 a single ``SRC_URI`` entry. On the other hand, if the recipe or 7048 append file needs to fetch a tarball, apply two patches, and include 7049 a custom file, the recipe or append file would include four instances 7050 of the variable. 7051 7052 The following list explains the available URI protocols. URI 7053 protocols are highly dependent on particular BitBake Fetcher 7054 submodules. Depending on the fetcher BitBake uses, various URL 7055 parameters are employed. For specifics on the supported Fetchers, see 7056 the ":ref:`Fetchers <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-fetching:fetchers>`" section in the 7057 BitBake User Manual. 7058 7059 - ``file://`` - Fetches files, which are usually files shipped 7060 with the :term:`Metadata`, from the local machine (e.g. 7061 :ref:`patch <overview-manual/concepts:patching>` files). 7062 The path is relative to the :term:`FILESPATH` 7063 variable. Thus, the build system searches, in order, from the 7064 following directories, which are assumed to be a subdirectories of 7065 the directory in which the recipe file (``.bb``) or append file 7066 (``.bbappend``) resides: 7067 7068 - ``${BPN}`` - The base recipe name without any special suffix 7069 or version numbers. 7070 7071 - ``${BP}`` - ``${BPN}-${PV}``. The base recipe name and 7072 version but without any special package name suffix. 7073 7074 - *files -* Files within a directory, which is named ``files`` 7075 and is also alongside the recipe or append file. 7076 7077 .. note:: 7078 7079 If you want the build system to pick up files specified through 7080 a 7081 SRC_URI 7082 statement from your append file, you need to be sure to extend 7083 the 7084 FILESPATH 7085 variable by also using the 7086 FILESEXTRAPATHS 7087 variable from within your append file. 7088 7089 - ``bzr://`` - Fetches files from a Bazaar revision control 7090 repository. 7091 7092 - ``git://`` - Fetches files from a Git revision control 7093 repository. 7094 7095 - ``osc://`` - Fetches files from an OSC (OpenSUSE Build service) 7096 revision control repository. 7097 7098 - ``repo://`` - Fetches files from a repo (Git) repository. 7099 7100 - ``ccrc://`` - Fetches files from a ClearCase repository. 7101 7102 - ``http://`` - Fetches files from the Internet using ``http``. 7103 7104 - ``https://`` - Fetches files from the Internet using ``https``. 7105 7106 - ``ftp://`` - Fetches files from the Internet using ``ftp``. 7107 7108 - ``cvs://`` - Fetches files from a CVS revision control 7109 repository. 7110 7111 - ``hg://`` - Fetches files from a Mercurial (``hg``) revision 7112 control repository. 7113 7114 - ``p4://`` - Fetches files from a Perforce (``p4``) revision 7115 control repository. 7116 7117 - ``ssh://`` - Fetches files from a secure shell. 7118 7119 - ``svn://`` - Fetches files from a Subversion (``svn``) revision 7120 control repository. 7121 7122 - ``npm://`` - Fetches JavaScript modules from a registry. 7123 7124 - ``az://`` - Fetches files from an Azure Storage account. 7125 7126 Standard and recipe-specific options for ``SRC_URI`` exist. Here are 7127 standard options: 7128 7129 - ``apply`` - Whether to apply the patch or not. The default 7130 action is to apply the patch. 7131 7132 - ``striplevel`` - Which striplevel to use when applying the 7133 patch. The default level is 1. 7134 7135 - ``patchdir`` - Specifies the directory in which the patch should 7136 be applied. The default is ``${``\ :term:`S`\ ``}``. 7137 7138 Here are options specific to recipes building code from a revision 7139 control system: 7140 7141 - ``mindate`` - Apply the patch only if 7142 :term:`SRCDATE` is equal to or greater than 7143 ``mindate``. 7144 7145 - ``maxdate`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCDATE`` is not later 7146 than ``maxdate``. 7147 7148 - ``minrev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is equal to or 7149 greater than ``minrev``. 7150 7151 - ``maxrev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is not later 7152 than ``maxrev``. 7153 7154 - ``rev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is equal to 7155 ``rev``. 7156 7157 - ``notrev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is not equal to 7158 ``rev``. 7159 7160 Here are some additional options worth mentioning: 7161 7162 - ``unpack`` - Controls whether or not to unpack the file if it is 7163 an archive. The default action is to unpack the file. 7164 7165 - ``destsuffix`` - Places the file (or extracts its contents) into 7166 the specified subdirectory of :term:`WORKDIR` when 7167 the Git fetcher is used. 7168 7169 - ``subdir`` - Places the file (or extracts its contents) into the 7170 specified subdirectory of ``WORKDIR`` when the local (``file://``) 7171 fetcher is used. 7172 7173 - ``localdir`` - Places the file (or extracts its contents) into 7174 the specified subdirectory of ``WORKDIR`` when the CVS fetcher is 7175 used. 7176 7177 - ``subpath`` - Limits the checkout to a specific subpath of the 7178 tree when using the Git fetcher is used. 7179 7180 - ``name`` - Specifies a name to be used for association with 7181 ``SRC_URI`` checksums or :term:`SRCREV` when you have more than one 7182 file or git repository specified in ``SRC_URI``. For example: 7183 :: 7184 7185 SRC_URI = "git://example.com/foo.git;name=first \ 7186 git://example.com/bar.git;name=second \ 7187 http://example.com/file.tar.gz;name=third" 7188 7189 SRCREV_first = "f1d2d2f924e986ac86fdf7b36c94bcdf32beec15" 7190 SRCREV_second = "e242ed3bffccdf271b7fbaf34ed72d089537b42f" 7191 SRC_URI[third.sha256sum] = "13550350a8681c84c861aac2e5b440161c2b33a3e4f302ac680ca5b686de48de" 7192 7193 7194 - ``downloadfilename`` - Specifies the filename used when storing 7195 the downloaded file. 7196 7197 :term:`SRC_URI_OVERRIDES_PACKAGE_ARCH` 7198 By default, the OpenEmbedded build system automatically detects 7199 whether ``SRC_URI`` contains files that are machine-specific. If so, 7200 the build system automatically changes ``PACKAGE_ARCH``. Setting this 7201 variable to "0" disables this behavior. 7202 7203 :term:`SRCDATE` 7204 The date of the source code used to build the package. This variable 7205 applies only if the source was fetched from a Source Code Manager 7206 (SCM). 7207 7208 :term:`SRCPV` 7209 Returns the version string of the current package. This string is 7210 used to help define the value of :term:`PV`. 7211 7212 The ``SRCPV`` variable is defined in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` 7213 configuration file in the :term:`Source Directory` as 7214 follows: 7215 :: 7216 7217 SRCPV = "${@bb.fetch2.get_srcrev(d)}" 7218 7219 Recipes that need to define ``PV`` do so with the help of the 7220 ``SRCPV``. For example, the ``ofono`` recipe (``ofono_git.bb``) 7221 located in ``meta/recipes-connectivity`` in the Source Directory 7222 defines ``PV`` as follows: 7223 :: 7224 7225 PV = "0.12-git${SRCPV}" 7226 7227 :term:`SRCREV` 7228 The revision of the source code used to build the package. This 7229 variable applies to Subversion, Git, Mercurial, and Bazaar only. Note 7230 that if you want to build a fixed revision and you want to avoid 7231 performing a query on the remote repository every time BitBake parses 7232 your recipe, you should specify a ``SRCREV`` that is a full revision 7233 identifier and not just a tag. 7234 7235 .. note:: 7236 7237 For information on limitations when inheriting the latest revision 7238 of software using ``SRCREV``, see the :term:`AUTOREV` variable 7239 description and the 7240 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:automatically incrementing a package version number`" 7241 section, which is in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 7242 7243 :term:`SSTATE_DIR` 7244 The directory for the shared state cache. 7245 7246 :term:`SSTATE_MIRROR_ALLOW_NETWORK` 7247 If set to "1", allows fetches from mirrors that are specified in 7248 :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS` to work even when 7249 fetching from the network is disabled by setting ``BB_NO_NETWORK`` to 7250 "1". Using the ``SSTATE_MIRROR_ALLOW_NETWORK`` variable is useful if 7251 you have set ``SSTATE_MIRRORS`` to point to an internal server for 7252 your shared state cache, but you want to disable any other fetching 7253 from the network. 7254 7255 :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS` 7256 Configures the OpenEmbedded build system to search other mirror 7257 locations for prebuilt cache data objects before building out the 7258 data. This variable works like fetcher :term:`MIRRORS` 7259 and :term:`PREMIRRORS` and points to the cache 7260 locations to check for the shared state (sstate) objects. 7261 7262 You can specify a filesystem directory or a remote URL such as HTTP 7263 or FTP. The locations you specify need to contain the shared state 7264 cache (sstate-cache) results from previous builds. The sstate-cache 7265 you point to can also be from builds on other machines. 7266 7267 When pointing to sstate build artifacts on another machine that uses 7268 a different GCC version for native builds, you must configure 7269 ``SSTATE_MIRRORS`` with a regular expression that maps local search 7270 paths to server paths. The paths need to take into account 7271 :term:`NATIVELSBSTRING` set by the 7272 :ref:`uninative <ref-classes-uninative>` class. For example, the 7273 following maps the local search path ``universal-4.9`` to the 7274 server-provided path server_url_sstate_path: 7275 :: 7276 7277 SSTATE_MIRRORS ?= "file://universal-4.9/(.*) http://server_url_sstate_path/universal-4.8/\1 \n" 7278 7279 If a mirror uses the same structure as 7280 :term:`SSTATE_DIR`, you need to add "PATH" at the 7281 end as shown in the examples below. The build system substitutes the 7282 correct path within the directory structure. 7283 :: 7284 7285 SSTATE_MIRRORS ?= "\ 7286 file://.* http://someserver.tld/share/sstate/PATH;downloadfilename=PATH \n \ 7287 file://.* file:///some-local-dir/sstate/PATH" 7288 7289 :term:`SSTATE_SCAN_FILES` 7290 Controls the list of files the OpenEmbedded build system scans for 7291 hardcoded installation paths. The variable uses a space-separated 7292 list of filenames (not paths) with standard wildcard characters 7293 allowed. 7294 7295 During a build, the OpenEmbedded build system creates a shared state 7296 (sstate) object during the first stage of preparing the sysroots. 7297 That object is scanned for hardcoded paths for original installation 7298 locations. The list of files that are scanned for paths is controlled 7299 by the ``SSTATE_SCAN_FILES`` variable. Typically, recipes add files 7300 they want to be scanned to the value of ``SSTATE_SCAN_FILES`` rather 7301 than the variable being comprehensively set. The 7302 :ref:`sstate <ref-classes-sstate>` class specifies the default list 7303 of files. 7304 7305 For details on the process, see the 7306 :ref:`staging <ref-classes-staging>` class. 7307 7308 :term:`STAGING_BASE_LIBDIR_NATIVE` 7309 Specifies the path to the ``/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7310 directory for the build host. 7311 7312 :term:`STAGING_BASELIBDIR` 7313 Specifies the path to the ``/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7314 directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built 7315 (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). 7316 7317 :term:`STAGING_BINDIR` 7318 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/bin`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7319 directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built 7320 (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). 7321 7322 :term:`STAGING_BINDIR_CROSS` 7323 Specifies the path to the directory containing binary configuration 7324 scripts. These scripts provide configuration information for other 7325 software that wants to make use of libraries or include files 7326 provided by the software associated with the script. 7327 7328 .. note:: 7329 7330 This style of build configuration has been largely replaced by 7331 ``pkg-config``. Consequently, if ``pkg-config`` is supported by the 7332 library to which you are linking, it is recommended you use 7333 ``pkg-config`` instead of a provided configuration script. 7334 7335 :term:`STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE` 7336 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/bin`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7337 directory for the build host. 7338 7339 :term:`STAGING_DATADIR` 7340 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/share`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7341 directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built 7342 (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). 7343 7344 :term:`STAGING_DATADIR_NATIVE` 7345 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/share`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7346 directory for the build host. 7347 7348 :term:`STAGING_DIR` 7349 Helps construct the ``recipe-sysroots`` directory, which is used 7350 during packaging. 7351 7352 For information on how staging for recipe-specific sysroots occurs, 7353 see the :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` 7354 task, the ":ref:`sdk-manual/extensible:sharing files between recipes`" 7355 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual, the 7356 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:configuration, compilation, and staging`" 7357 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual, and the 7358 :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS` variable. 7359 7360 .. note:: 7361 7362 Recipes should never write files directly under the ``STAGING_DIR`` 7363 directory because the OpenEmbedded build system manages the 7364 directory automatically. Instead, files should be installed to 7365 ``${``\ :term:`D`\ ``}`` within your recipe's :ref:`ref-tasks-install` 7366 task and then the OpenEmbedded build system will stage a subset of 7367 those files into the sysroot. 7368 7369 :term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST` 7370 Specifies the path to the sysroot directory for the system on which 7371 the component is built to run (the system that hosts the component). 7372 For most recipes, this sysroot is the one in which that recipe's 7373 :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task copies 7374 files. Exceptions include ``-native`` recipes, where the 7375 ``do_populate_sysroot`` task instead uses 7376 :term:`STAGING_DIR_NATIVE`. Depending on 7377 the type of recipe and the build target, ``STAGING_DIR_HOST`` can 7378 have the following values: 7379 7380 - For recipes building for the target machine, the value is 7381 "${:term:`STAGING_DIR`}/${:term:`MACHINE`}". 7382 7383 - For native recipes building for the build host, the value is empty 7384 given the assumption that when building for the build host, the 7385 build host's own directories should be used. 7386 7387 .. note:: 7388 7389 ``-native`` recipes are not installed into host paths like such 7390 as ``/usr``. Rather, these recipes are installed into 7391 ``STAGING_DIR_NATIVE``. When compiling ``-native`` recipes, 7392 standard build environment variables such as 7393 :term:`CPPFLAGS` and 7394 :term:`CFLAGS` are set up so that both host paths 7395 and ``STAGING_DIR_NATIVE`` are searched for libraries and 7396 headers using, for example, GCC's ``-isystem`` option. 7397 7398 Thus, the emphasis is that the ``STAGING_DIR*`` variables 7399 should be viewed as input variables by tasks such as 7400 :ref:`ref-tasks-configure`, 7401 :ref:`ref-tasks-compile`, and 7402 :ref:`ref-tasks-install`. Having the real system 7403 root correspond to ``STAGING_DIR_HOST`` makes conceptual sense 7404 for ``-native`` recipes, as they make use of host headers and 7405 libraries. 7406 7407 :term:`STAGING_DIR_NATIVE` 7408 Specifies the path to the sysroot directory used when building 7409 components that run on the build host itself. 7410 7411 :term:`STAGING_DIR_TARGET` 7412 Specifies the path to the sysroot used for the system for which the 7413 component generates code. For components that do not generate code, 7414 which is the majority, ``STAGING_DIR_TARGET`` is set to match 7415 :term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`. 7416 7417 Some recipes build binaries that can run on the target system but 7418 those binaries in turn generate code for another different system 7419 (e.g. cross-canadian recipes). Using terminology from GNU, the 7420 primary system is referred to as the "HOST" and the secondary, or 7421 different, system is referred to as the "TARGET". Thus, the binaries 7422 run on the "HOST" system and generate binaries for the "TARGET" 7423 system. The ``STAGING_DIR_HOST`` variable points to the sysroot used 7424 for the "HOST" system, while ``STAGING_DIR_TARGET`` points to the 7425 sysroot used for the "TARGET" system. 7426 7427 :term:`STAGING_ETCDIR_NATIVE` 7428 Specifies the path to the ``/etc`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7429 directory for the build host. 7430 7431 :term:`STAGING_EXECPREFIXDIR` 7432 Specifies the path to the ``/usr`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7433 directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built 7434 (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). 7435 7436 :term:`STAGING_INCDIR` 7437 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/include`` subdirectory of the 7438 sysroot directory for the target for which the current recipe being 7439 built (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). 7440 7441 :term:`STAGING_INCDIR_NATIVE` 7442 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/include`` subdirectory of the 7443 sysroot directory for the build host. 7444 7445 :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_BUILDDIR` 7446 Points to the directory containing the kernel build artifacts. 7447 Recipes building software that needs to access kernel build artifacts 7448 (e.g. ``systemtap-uprobes``) can look in the directory specified with 7449 the ``STAGING_KERNEL_BUILDDIR`` variable to find these artifacts 7450 after the kernel has been built. 7451 7452 :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_DIR` 7453 The directory with kernel headers that are required to build 7454 out-of-tree modules. 7455 7456 :term:`STAGING_LIBDIR` 7457 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7458 directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built 7459 (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). 7460 7461 :term:`STAGING_LIBDIR_NATIVE` 7462 Specifies the path to the ``/usr/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot 7463 directory for the build host. 7464 7465 :term:`STAMP` 7466 Specifies the base path used to create recipe stamp files. The path 7467 to an actual stamp file is constructed by evaluating this string and 7468 then appending additional information. Currently, the default 7469 assignment for ``STAMP`` as set in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` 7470 file is: 7471 :: 7472 7473 STAMP = "${STAMPS_DIR}/${MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS}/${PN}/${EXTENDPE}${PV}-${PR}" 7474 7475 For information on how BitBake uses stamp files to determine if a 7476 task should be rerun, see the 7477 ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:stamp files and the rerunning of tasks`" 7478 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. 7479 7480 See :term:`STAMPS_DIR`, 7481 :term:`MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS`, 7482 :term:`PN`, :term:`EXTENDPE`, 7483 :term:`PV`, and :term:`PR` for related variable 7484 information. 7485 7486 :term:`STAMPS_DIR` 7487 Specifies the base directory in which the OpenEmbedded build system 7488 places stamps. The default directory is ``${TMPDIR}/stamps``. 7489 7490 :term:`STRIP` 7491 The minimal command and arguments to run ``strip``, which is used to 7492 strip symbols. 7493 7494 :term:`SUMMARY` 7495 The short (72 characters or less) summary of the binary package for 7496 packaging systems such as ``opkg``, ``rpm``, or ``dpkg``. By default, 7497 ``SUMMARY`` is used to define the 7498 :term:`DESCRIPTION` variable if ``DESCRIPTION`` is 7499 not set in the recipe. 7500 7501 :term:`SVNDIR` 7502 The directory in which files checked out of a Subversion system are 7503 stored. 7504 7505 :term:`SYSLINUX_DEFAULT_CONSOLE` 7506 Specifies the kernel boot default console. If you want to use a 7507 console other than the default, set this variable in your recipe as 7508 follows where "X" is the console number you want to use: 7509 :: 7510 7511 SYSLINUX_DEFAULT_CONSOLE = "console=ttyX" 7512 7513 The :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class initially sets 7514 this variable to null but then checks for a value later. 7515 7516 :term:`SYSLINUX_OPTS` 7517 Lists additional options to add to the syslinux file. You need to set 7518 this variable in your recipe. If you want to list multiple options, 7519 separate the options with a semicolon character (``;``). 7520 7521 The :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class uses this variable 7522 to create a set of options. 7523 7524 :term:`SYSLINUX_SERIAL` 7525 Specifies the alternate serial port or turns it off. To turn off 7526 serial, set this variable to an empty string in your recipe. The 7527 variable's default value is set in the 7528 :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class as follows: 7529 :: 7530 7531 SYSLINUX_SERIAL ?= "0 115200" 7532 7533 The class checks for and uses the variable as needed. 7534 7535 :term:`SYSLINUX_SERIAL_TTY` 7536 Specifies the alternate console=tty... kernel boot argument. The 7537 variable's default value is set in the 7538 :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class as follows: 7539 :: 7540 7541 SYSLINUX_SERIAL_TTY ?= "console=ttyS0,115200" 7542 7543 The class checks for and uses the variable as needed. 7544 7545 :term:`SYSLINUX_SPLASH` 7546 An ``.LSS`` file used as the background for the VGA boot menu when 7547 you use the boot menu. You need to set this variable in your recipe. 7548 7549 The :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class checks for this 7550 variable and if found, the OpenEmbedded build system installs the 7551 splash screen. 7552 7553 :term:`SYSROOT_DESTDIR` 7554 Points to the temporary directory under the work directory (default 7555 "``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}/sysroot-destdir``") 7556 where the files populated into the sysroot are assembled during the 7557 :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task. 7558 7559 :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS` 7560 Directories that are staged into the sysroot by the 7561 :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task. By 7562 default, the following directories are staged: 7563 :: 7564 7565 SYSROOT_DIRS = " \ 7566 ${includedir} \ 7567 ${libdir} \ 7568 ${base_libdir} \ 7569 ${nonarch_base_libdir} \ 7570 ${datadir} \ 7571 " 7572 7573 :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS_BLACKLIST` 7574 Directories that are not staged into the sysroot by the 7575 :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task. You 7576 can use this variable to exclude certain subdirectories of 7577 directories listed in :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS` from 7578 staging. By default, the following directories are not staged: 7579 :: 7580 7581 SYSROOT_DIRS_BLACKLIST = " \ 7582 ${mandir} \ 7583 ${docdir} \ 7584 ${infodir} \ 7585 ${datadir}/locale \ 7586 ${datadir}/applications \ 7587 ${datadir}/fonts \ 7588 ${datadir}/pixmaps \ 7589 " 7590 7591 :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS_NATIVE` 7592 Extra directories staged into the sysroot by the 7593 :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task for 7594 ``-native`` recipes, in addition to those specified in 7595 :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS`. By default, the following 7596 extra directories are staged: 7597 :: 7598 7599 SYSROOT_DIRS_NATIVE = " \ 7600 ${bindir} \ 7601 ${sbindir} \ 7602 ${base_bindir} \ 7603 ${base_sbindir} \ 7604 ${libexecdir} \ 7605 ${sysconfdir} \ 7606 ${localstatedir} \ 7607 " 7608 7609 .. note:: 7610 7611 Programs built by ``-native`` recipes run directly from the sysroot 7612 (:term:`STAGING_DIR_NATIVE`), which is why additional directories 7613 containing program executables and supporting files need to be staged. 7614 7615 :term:`SYSROOT_PREPROCESS_FUNCS` 7616 A list of functions to execute after files are staged into the 7617 sysroot. These functions are usually used to apply additional 7618 processing on the staged files, or to stage additional files. 7619 7620 :term:`SYSTEMD_AUTO_ENABLE` 7621 When inheriting the :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class, 7622 this variable specifies whether the specified service in 7623 :term:`SYSTEMD_SERVICE` should start 7624 automatically or not. By default, the service is enabled to 7625 automatically start at boot time. The default setting is in the 7626 :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class as follows: 7627 :: 7628 7629 SYSTEMD_AUTO_ENABLE ??= "enable" 7630 7631 You can disable the service by setting the variable to "disable". 7632 7633 :term:`SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG` 7634 When :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` is set to 7635 "systemd-boot", the ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG`` variable specifies the 7636 configuration file that should be used. By default, the 7637 :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` class sets the 7638 ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG`` as follows: 7639 :: 7640 7641 SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG ?= "${:term:`S`}/loader.conf" 7642 7643 For information on Systemd-boot, see the `Systemd-boot 7644 documentation <https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/systemd/systemd-boot/>`__. 7645 7646 :term:`SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES` 7647 When :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` is set to 7648 "systemd-boot", the ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES`` variable specifies a 7649 list of entry files (``*.conf``) to install that contain one boot 7650 entry per file. By default, the 7651 :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` class sets the 7652 ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES`` as follows: 7653 :: 7654 7655 SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES ?= "" 7656 7657 For information on Systemd-boot, see the `Systemd-boot 7658 documentation <https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/systemd/systemd-boot/>`__. 7659 7660 :term:`SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT` 7661 When :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` is set to 7662 "systemd-boot", the ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT`` variable specifies the 7663 boot menu timeout in seconds. By default, the 7664 :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` class sets the 7665 ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT`` as follows: 7666 :: 7667 7668 SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT ?= "10" 7669 7670 For information on Systemd-boot, see the `Systemd-boot 7671 documentation <https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/systemd/systemd-boot/>`__. 7672 7673 :term:`SYSTEMD_PACKAGES` 7674 When inheriting the :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class, 7675 this variable locates the systemd unit files when they are not found 7676 in the main recipe's package. By default, the ``SYSTEMD_PACKAGES`` 7677 variable is set such that the systemd unit files are assumed to 7678 reside in the recipes main package: 7679 :: 7680 7681 SYSTEMD_PACKAGES ?= "${PN}" 7682 7683 If these unit files are not in this recipe's main package, you need 7684 to use ``SYSTEMD_PACKAGES`` to list the package or packages in which 7685 the build system can find the systemd unit files. 7686 7687 :term:`SYSTEMD_SERVICE` 7688 When inheriting the :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class, 7689 this variable specifies the systemd service name for a package. 7690 7691 When you specify this file in your recipe, use a package name 7692 override to indicate the package to which the value applies. Here is 7693 an example from the connman recipe: 7694 :: 7695 7696 SYSTEMD_SERVICE_${PN} = "connman.service" 7697 7698 :term:`SYSVINIT_ENABLED_GETTYS` 7699 When using 7700 :ref:`SysVinit <dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling system services>`, 7701 specifies a space-separated list of the virtual terminals that should 7702 run a `getty <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_%28Unix%29>`__ 7703 (allowing login), assuming :term:`USE_VT` is not set to 7704 "0". 7705 7706 The default value for ``SYSVINIT_ENABLED_GETTYS`` is "1" (i.e. only 7707 run a getty on the first virtual terminal). 7708 7709 :term:`T` 7710 This variable points to a directory were BitBake places temporary 7711 files, which consist mostly of task logs and scripts, when building a 7712 particular recipe. The variable is typically set as follows: 7713 :: 7714 7715 T = "${WORKDIR}/temp" 7716 7717 The :term:`WORKDIR` is the directory into which 7718 BitBake unpacks and builds the recipe. The default ``bitbake.conf`` 7719 file sets this variable. 7720 7721 The ``T`` variable is not to be confused with the 7722 :term:`TMPDIR` variable, which points to the root of 7723 the directory tree where BitBake places the output of an entire 7724 build. 7725 7726 :term:`TARGET_ARCH` 7727 The target machine's architecture. The OpenEmbedded build system 7728 supports many architectures. Here is an example list of architectures 7729 supported. This list is by no means complete as the architecture is 7730 configurable: 7731 7732 - arm 7733 - i586 7734 - x86_64 7735 - powerpc 7736 - powerpc64 7737 - mips 7738 - mipsel 7739 7740 For additional information on machine architectures, see the 7741 :term:`TUNE_ARCH` variable. 7742 7743 :term:`TARGET_AS_ARCH` 7744 Specifies architecture-specific assembler flags for the target 7745 system. ``TARGET_AS_ARCH`` is initialized from 7746 :term:`TUNE_ASARGS` by default in the BitBake 7747 configuration file (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``): 7748 :: 7749 7750 TARGET_AS_ARCH = "${TUNE_ASARGS}" 7751 7752 :term:`TARGET_CC_ARCH` 7753 Specifies architecture-specific C compiler flags for the target 7754 system. ``TARGET_CC_ARCH`` is initialized from 7755 :term:`TUNE_CCARGS` by default. 7756 7757 .. note:: 7758 7759 It is a common workaround to append :term:`LDFLAGS` to 7760 ``TARGET_CC_ARCH`` in recipes that build software for the target that 7761 would not otherwise respect the exported ``LDFLAGS`` variable. 7762 7763 :term:`TARGET_CC_KERNEL_ARCH` 7764 This is a specific kernel compiler flag for a CPU or Application 7765 Binary Interface (ABI) tune. The flag is used rarely and only for 7766 cases where a userspace :term:`TUNE_CCARGS` is not 7767 compatible with the kernel compilation. The ``TARGET_CC_KERNEL_ARCH`` 7768 variable allows the kernel (and associated modules) to use a 7769 different configuration. See the 7770 ``meta/conf/machine/include/arm/feature-arm-thumb.inc`` file in the 7771 :term:`Source Directory` for an example. 7772 7773 :term:`TARGET_CFLAGS` 7774 Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler when building for the 7775 target. When building in the target context, 7776 :term:`CFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable by 7777 default. 7778 7779 Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the ``CFLAGS`` 7780 variable in the environment to the ``TARGET_CFLAGS`` value so that 7781 executables built using the SDK also have the flags applied. 7782 7783 :term:`TARGET_CPPFLAGS` 7784 Specifies the flags to pass to the C pre-processor (i.e. to both the 7785 C and the C++ compilers) when building for the target. When building 7786 in the target context, :term:`CPPFLAGS` is set to the 7787 value of this variable by default. 7788 7789 Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the 7790 ``CPPFLAGS`` variable in the environment to the ``TARGET_CPPFLAGS`` 7791 value so that executables built using the SDK also have the flags 7792 applied. 7793 7794 :term:`TARGET_CXXFLAGS` 7795 Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler when building for the 7796 target. When building in the target context, 7797 :term:`CXXFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable 7798 by default. 7799 7800 Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the 7801 ``CXXFLAGS`` variable in the environment to the ``TARGET_CXXFLAGS`` 7802 value so that executables built using the SDK also have the flags 7803 applied. 7804 7805 :term:`TARGET_FPU` 7806 Specifies the method for handling FPU code. For FPU-less targets, 7807 which include most ARM CPUs, the variable must be set to "soft". If 7808 not, the kernel emulation gets used, which results in a performance 7809 penalty. 7810 7811 :term:`TARGET_LD_ARCH` 7812 Specifies architecture-specific linker flags for the target system. 7813 ``TARGET_LD_ARCH`` is initialized from 7814 :term:`TUNE_LDARGS` by default in the BitBake 7815 configuration file (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``): 7816 :: 7817 7818 TARGET_LD_ARCH = "${TUNE_LDARGS}" 7819 7820 :term:`TARGET_LDFLAGS` 7821 Specifies the flags to pass to the linker when building for the 7822 target. When building in the target context, 7823 :term:`LDFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable 7824 by default. 7825 7826 Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the 7827 :term:`LDFLAGS` variable in the environment to the 7828 ``TARGET_LDFLAGS`` value so that executables built using the SDK also 7829 have the flags applied. 7830 7831 :term:`TARGET_OS` 7832 Specifies the target's operating system. The variable can be set to 7833 "linux" for glibc-based systems (GNU C Library) and to "linux-musl" 7834 for musl libc. For ARM/EABI targets, "linux-gnueabi" and 7835 "linux-musleabi" possible values exist. 7836 7837 :term:`TARGET_PREFIX` 7838 Specifies the prefix used for the toolchain binary target tools. 7839 7840 Depending on the type of recipe and the build target, 7841 ``TARGET_PREFIX`` is set as follows: 7842 7843 - For recipes building for the target machine, the value is 7844 "${:term:`TARGET_SYS`}-". 7845 7846 - For native recipes, the build system sets the variable to the 7847 value of ``BUILD_PREFIX``. 7848 7849 - For native SDK recipes (``nativesdk``), the build system sets the 7850 variable to the value of ``SDK_PREFIX``. 7851 7852 :term:`TARGET_SYS` 7853 Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating 7854 system, for which the build is occurring in the context of the 7855 current recipe. 7856 7857 The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based 7858 on :term:`TARGET_ARCH`, 7859 :term:`TARGET_VENDOR`, and 7860 :term:`TARGET_OS` variables. 7861 7862 .. note:: 7863 7864 You do not need to set the ``TARGET_SYS`` variable yourself. 7865 7866 Consider these two examples: 7867 7868 - Given a native recipe on a 32-bit, x86 machine running Linux, the 7869 value is "i686-linux". 7870 7871 - Given a recipe being built for a little-endian, MIPS target 7872 running Linux, the value might be "mipsel-linux". 7873 7874 :term:`TARGET_VENDOR` 7875 Specifies the name of the target vendor. 7876 7877 :term:`TCLIBC` 7878 Specifies the GNU standard C library (``libc``) variant to use during 7879 the build process. This variable replaces ``POKYLIBC``, which is no 7880 longer supported. 7881 7882 You can select "glibc", "musl", "newlib", or "baremetal" 7883 7884 :term:`TCLIBCAPPEND` 7885 Specifies a suffix to be appended onto the 7886 :term:`TMPDIR` value. The suffix identifies the 7887 ``libc`` variant for building. When you are building for multiple 7888 variants with the same :term:`Build Directory`, this 7889 mechanism ensures that output for different ``libc`` variants is kept 7890 separate to avoid potential conflicts. 7891 7892 In the ``defaultsetup.conf`` file, the default value of 7893 ``TCLIBCAPPEND`` is "-${TCLIBC}". However, distros such as poky, 7894 which normally only support one ``libc`` variant, set 7895 ``TCLIBCAPPEND`` to "" in their distro configuration file resulting 7896 in no suffix being applied. 7897 7898 :term:`TCMODE` 7899 Specifies the toolchain selector. ``TCMODE`` controls the 7900 characteristics of the generated packages and images by telling the 7901 OpenEmbedded build system which toolchain profile to use. By default, 7902 the OpenEmbedded build system builds its own internal toolchain. The 7903 variable's default value is "default", which uses that internal 7904 toolchain. 7905 7906 .. note:: 7907 7908 If ``TCMODE`` is set to a value other than "default", then it is your 7909 responsibility to ensure that the toolchain is compatible with the 7910 default toolchain. Using older or newer versions of these 7911 components might cause build problems. See the Release Notes for 7912 the Yocto Project release for the specific components with which 7913 the toolchain must be compatible. To access the Release Notes, go 7914 to the :yocto_home:`Downloads </software-overview/downloads>` 7915 page on the Yocto Project website and click on the "RELEASE 7916 INFORMATION" link for the appropriate release. 7917 7918 The ``TCMODE`` variable is similar to :term:`TCLIBC`, 7919 which controls the variant of the GNU standard C library (``libc``) 7920 used during the build process: ``glibc`` or ``musl``. 7921 7922 With additional layers, it is possible to use a pre-compiled external 7923 toolchain. One example is the Sourcery G++ Toolchain. The support for 7924 this toolchain resides in the separate Mentor Graphics 7925 ``meta-sourcery`` layer at 7926 https://github.com/MentorEmbedded/meta-sourcery/. 7927 7928 The layer's ``README`` file contains information on how to use the 7929 Sourcery G++ Toolchain as an external toolchain. In summary, you must 7930 be sure to add the layer to your ``bblayers.conf`` file in front of 7931 the ``meta`` layer and then set the ``EXTERNAL_TOOLCHAIN`` variable 7932 in your ``local.conf`` file to the location in which you installed 7933 the toolchain. 7934 7935 The fundamentals used for this example apply to any external 7936 toolchain. You can use ``meta-sourcery`` as a template for adding 7937 support for other external toolchains. 7938 7939 :term:`TEST_EXPORT_DIR` 7940 The location the OpenEmbedded build system uses to export tests when 7941 the :term:`TEST_EXPORT_ONLY` variable is set 7942 to "1". 7943 7944 The ``TEST_EXPORT_DIR`` variable defaults to 7945 ``"${TMPDIR}/testimage/${PN}"``. 7946 7947 :term:`TEST_EXPORT_ONLY` 7948 Specifies to export the tests only. Set this variable to "1" if you 7949 do not want to run the tests but you want them to be exported in a 7950 manner that you to run them outside of the build system. 7951 7952 :term:`TEST_LOG_DIR` 7953 Holds the SSH log and the boot log for QEMU machines. The 7954 ``TEST_LOG_DIR`` variable defaults to ``"${WORKDIR}/testimage"``. 7955 7956 .. note:: 7957 7958 Actual test results reside in the task log (``log.do_testimage``), 7959 which is in the ``${WORKDIR}/temp/`` directory. 7960 7961 :term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD` 7962 For automated hardware testing, specifies the command to use to 7963 control the power of the target machine under test. Typically, this 7964 command would point to a script that performs the appropriate action 7965 (e.g. interacting with a web-enabled power strip). The specified 7966 command should expect to receive as the last argument "off", "on" or 7967 "cycle" specifying to power off, on, or cycle (power off and then 7968 power on) the device, respectively. 7969 7970 :term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS` 7971 For automated hardware testing, specifies additional arguments to 7972 pass through to the command specified in 7973 :term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD`. Setting 7974 ``TEST_POWERCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS`` is optional. You can use it if you 7975 wish, for example, to separate the machine-specific and 7976 non-machine-specific parts of the arguments. 7977 7978 :term:`TEST_QEMUBOOT_TIMEOUT` 7979 The time in seconds allowed for an image to boot before automated 7980 runtime tests begin to run against an image. The default timeout 7981 period to allow the boot process to reach the login prompt is 500 7982 seconds. You can specify a different value in the ``local.conf`` 7983 file. 7984 7985 For more information on testing images, see the 7986 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:performing automated runtime testing`" 7987 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 7988 7989 :term:`TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD` 7990 For automated hardware testing, specifies the command to use to 7991 connect to the serial console of the target machine under test. This 7992 command simply needs to connect to the serial console and forward 7993 that connection to standard input and output as any normal terminal 7994 program does. 7995 7996 For example, to use the Picocom terminal program on serial device 7997 ``/dev/ttyUSB0`` at 115200bps, you would set the variable as follows: 7998 :: 7999 8000 TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD = "picocom /dev/ttyUSB0 -b 115200" 8001 8002 :term:`TEST_SERIALCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS` 8003 For automated hardware testing, specifies additional arguments to 8004 pass through to the command specified in 8005 :term:`TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD`. Setting 8006 ``TEST_SERIALCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS`` is optional. You can use it if you 8007 wish, for example, to separate the machine-specific and 8008 non-machine-specific parts of the command. 8009 8010 :term:`TEST_SERVER_IP` 8011 The IP address of the build machine (host machine). This IP address 8012 is usually automatically detected. However, if detection fails, this 8013 variable needs to be set to the IP address of the build machine (i.e. 8014 where the build is taking place). 8015 8016 .. note:: 8017 8018 The ``TEST_SERVER_IP`` variable is only used for a small number of 8019 tests such as the "dnf" test suite, which needs to download packages 8020 from ``WORKDIR/oe-rootfs-repo``. 8021 8022 :term:`TEST_SUITES` 8023 An ordered list of tests (modules) to run against an image when 8024 performing automated runtime testing. 8025 8026 The OpenEmbedded build system provides a core set of tests that can 8027 be used against images. 8028 8029 .. note:: 8030 8031 Currently, there is only support for running these tests under 8032 QEMU. 8033 8034 Tests include ``ping``, ``ssh``, ``df`` among others. You can add 8035 your own tests to the list of tests by appending ``TEST_SUITES`` as 8036 follows: 8037 :: 8038 8039 TEST_SUITES_append = " mytest" 8040 8041 Alternatively, you can 8042 provide the "auto" option to have all applicable tests run against 8043 the image. 8044 :: 8045 8046 TEST_SUITES_append = " auto" 8047 8048 Using this option causes the 8049 build system to automatically run tests that are applicable to the 8050 image. Tests that are not applicable are skipped. 8051 8052 The order in which tests are run is important. Tests that depend on 8053 another test must appear later in the list than the test on which 8054 they depend. For example, if you append the list of tests with two 8055 tests (``test_A`` and ``test_B``) where ``test_B`` is dependent on 8056 ``test_A``, then you must order the tests as follows: 8057 :: 8058 8059 TEST_SUITES = "test_A test_B" 8060 8061 For more information on testing images, see the 8062 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:performing automated runtime testing`" 8063 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 8064 8065 :term:`TEST_TARGET` 8066 Specifies the target controller to use when running tests against a 8067 test image. The default controller to use is "qemu": 8068 :: 8069 8070 TEST_TARGET = "qemu" 8071 8072 A target controller is a class that defines how an image gets 8073 deployed on a target and how a target is started. A layer can extend 8074 the controllers by adding a module in the layer's 8075 ``/lib/oeqa/controllers`` directory and by inheriting the 8076 ``BaseTarget`` class, which is an abstract class that cannot be used 8077 as a value of ``TEST_TARGET``. 8078 8079 You can provide the following arguments with ``TEST_TARGET``: 8080 8081 - *"qemu":* Boots a QEMU image and runs the tests. See the 8082 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling runtime tests on qemu`" section 8083 in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for more 8084 information. 8085 8086 - *"simpleremote":* Runs the tests on target hardware that is 8087 already up and running. The hardware can be on the network or it 8088 can be a device running an image on QEMU. You must also set 8089 :term:`TEST_TARGET_IP` when you use 8090 "simpleremote". 8091 8092 .. note:: 8093 8094 This argument is defined in 8095 ``meta/lib/oeqa/controllers/simpleremote.py``. 8096 8097 For information on running tests on hardware, see the 8098 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling runtime tests on hardware`" 8099 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. 8100 8101 :term:`TEST_TARGET_IP` 8102 The IP address of your hardware under test. The ``TEST_TARGET_IP`` 8103 variable has no effect when :term:`TEST_TARGET` is 8104 set to "qemu". 8105 8106 When you specify the IP address, you can also include a port. Here is 8107 an example: 8108 :: 8109 8110 TEST_TARGET_IP = "192.168.1.4:2201" 8111 8112 Specifying a port is 8113 useful when SSH is started on a non-standard port or in cases when 8114 your hardware under test is behind a firewall or network that is not 8115 directly accessible from your host and you need to do port address 8116 translation. 8117 8118 :term:`TESTIMAGE_AUTO` 8119 Automatically runs the series of automated tests for images when an 8120 image is successfully built. Setting ``TESTIMAGE_AUTO`` to "1" causes 8121 any image that successfully builds to automatically boot under QEMU. 8122 Using the variable also adds in dependencies so that any SDK for 8123 which testing is requested is automatically built first. 8124 8125 These tests are written in Python making use of the ``unittest`` 8126 module, and the majority of them run commands on the target system 8127 over ``ssh``. You can set this variable to "1" in your ``local.conf`` 8128 file in the :term:`Build Directory` to have the 8129 OpenEmbedded build system automatically run these tests after an 8130 image successfully builds: 8131 8132 TESTIMAGE_AUTO = "1" 8133 8134 For more information 8135 on enabling, running, and writing these tests, see the 8136 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:performing automated runtime testing`" 8137 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual and the 8138 ":ref:`testimage*.bbclass <ref-classes-testimage*>`" section. 8139 8140 :term:`THISDIR` 8141 The directory in which the file BitBake is currently parsing is 8142 located. Do not manually set this variable. 8143 8144 :term:`TIME` 8145 The time the build was started. Times appear using the hour, minute, 8146 and second (HMS) format (e.g. "140159" for one minute and fifty-nine 8147 seconds past 1400 hours). 8148 8149 :term:`TMPDIR` 8150 This variable is the base directory the OpenEmbedded build system 8151 uses for all build output and intermediate files (other than the 8152 shared state cache). By default, the ``TMPDIR`` variable points to 8153 ``tmp`` within the :term:`Build Directory`. 8154 8155 If you want to establish this directory in a location other than the 8156 default, you can uncomment and edit the following statement in the 8157 ``conf/local.conf`` file in the :term:`Source Directory`: 8158 :: 8159 8160 #TMPDIR = "${TOPDIR}/tmp" 8161 8162 An example use for this scenario is to set ``TMPDIR`` to a local disk, 8163 which does not use NFS, while having the Build Directory use NFS. 8164 8165 The filesystem used by ``TMPDIR`` must have standard filesystem 8166 semantics (i.e. mixed-case files are unique, POSIX file locking, and 8167 persistent inodes). Due to various issues with NFS and bugs in some 8168 implementations, NFS does not meet this minimum requirement. 8169 Consequently, ``TMPDIR`` cannot be on NFS. 8170 8171 :term:`TOOLCHAIN_HOST_TASK` 8172 This variable lists packages the OpenEmbedded build system uses when 8173 building an SDK, which contains a cross-development environment. The 8174 packages specified by this variable are part of the toolchain set 8175 that runs on the :term:`SDKMACHINE`, and each 8176 package should usually have the prefix ``nativesdk-``. For example, 8177 consider the following command when building an SDK: 8178 :: 8179 8180 $ bitbake -c populate_sdk imagename 8181 8182 In this case, a default list of packages is 8183 set in this variable, but you can add additional packages to the 8184 list. See the 8185 ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing-standard:adding individual packages to the standard sdk`" section 8186 in the Yocto Project Application Development and the Extensible 8187 Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual for more information. 8188 8189 For background information on cross-development toolchains in the 8190 Yocto Project development environment, see the 8191 ":ref:`sdk-manual/intro:the cross-development toolchain`" 8192 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. For 8193 information on setting up a cross-development environment, see the 8194 :doc:`/sdk-manual/index` manual. 8195 8196 :term:`TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME` 8197 This variable defines the name used for the toolchain output. The 8198 :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class sets 8199 the ``TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME`` variable as follows: 8200 :: 8201 8202 TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME ?= "${SDK_NAME}-toolchain-${SDK_VERSION}" 8203 8204 See 8205 the :term:`SDK_NAME` and 8206 :term:`SDK_VERSION` variables for additional 8207 information. 8208 8209 :term:`TOOLCHAIN_TARGET_TASK` 8210 This variable lists packages the OpenEmbedded build system uses when 8211 it creates the target part of an SDK (i.e. the part built for the 8212 target hardware), which includes libraries and headers. Use this 8213 variable to add individual packages to the part of the SDK that runs 8214 on the target. See the 8215 ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing-standard:adding individual packages to the standard sdk`" section 8216 in the Yocto Project Application Development and the Extensible 8217 Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual for more information. 8218 8219 For background information on cross-development toolchains in the 8220 Yocto Project development environment, see the 8221 ":ref:`sdk-manual/intro:the cross-development toolchain`" 8222 section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. For 8223 information on setting up a cross-development environment, see the 8224 :doc:`/sdk-manual/index` manual. 8225 8226 :term:`TOPDIR` 8227 The top-level :term:`Build Directory`. BitBake 8228 automatically sets this variable when you initialize your build 8229 environment using :ref:`structure-core-script`. 8230 8231 :term:`TRANSLATED_TARGET_ARCH` 8232 A sanitized version of :term:`TARGET_ARCH`. This 8233 variable is used where the architecture is needed in a value where 8234 underscores are not allowed, for example within package filenames. In 8235 this case, dash characters replace any underscore characters used in 8236 ``TARGET_ARCH``. 8237 8238 Do not edit this variable. 8239 8240 :term:`TUNE_ARCH` 8241 The GNU canonical architecture for a specific architecture (i.e. 8242 ``arm``, ``armeb``, ``mips``, ``mips64``, and so forth). BitBake uses 8243 this value to setup configuration. 8244 8245 ``TUNE_ARCH`` definitions are specific to a given architecture. The 8246 definitions can be a single static definition, or can be dynamically 8247 adjusted. You can see details for a given CPU family by looking at 8248 the architecture's ``README`` file. For example, the 8249 ``meta/conf/machine/include/mips/README`` file in the 8250 :term:`Source Directory` provides information for 8251 ``TUNE_ARCH`` specific to the ``mips`` architecture. 8252 8253 ``TUNE_ARCH`` is tied closely to 8254 :term:`TARGET_ARCH`, which defines the target 8255 machine's architecture. The BitBake configuration file 8256 (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``) sets ``TARGET_ARCH`` as follows: 8257 :: 8258 8259 TARGET_ARCH = "${TUNE_ARCH}" 8260 8261 The following list, which is by no means complete since architectures 8262 are configurable, shows supported machine architectures: 8263 8264 - arm 8265 - i586 8266 - x86_64 8267 - powerpc 8268 - powerpc64 8269 - mips 8270 - mipsel 8271 8272 :term:`TUNE_ASARGS` 8273 Specifies architecture-specific assembler flags for the target 8274 system. The set of flags is based on the selected tune features. 8275 ``TUNE_ASARGS`` is set using the tune include files, which are 8276 typically under ``meta/conf/machine/include/`` and are influenced 8277 through :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`. For example, the 8278 ``meta/conf/machine/include/x86/arch-x86.inc`` file defines the flags 8279 for the x86 architecture as follows: 8280 :: 8281 8282 TUNE_ASARGS += "${@bb.utils.contains("TUNE_FEATURES", "mx32", "-x32", "", d)}" 8283 8284 .. note:: 8285 8286 Board Support Packages (BSPs) select the tune. The selected tune, 8287 in turn, affects the tune variables themselves (i.e. the tune can 8288 supply its own set of flags). 8289 8290 :term:`TUNE_CCARGS` 8291 Specifies architecture-specific C compiler flags for the target 8292 system. The set of flags is based on the selected tune features. 8293 ``TUNE_CCARGS`` is set using the tune include files, which are 8294 typically under ``meta/conf/machine/include/`` and are influenced 8295 through :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`. 8296 8297 .. note:: 8298 8299 Board Support Packages (BSPs) select the tune. The selected tune, 8300 in turn, affects the tune variables themselves (i.e. the tune can 8301 supply its own set of flags). 8302 8303 :term:`TUNE_FEATURES` 8304 Features used to "tune" a compiler for optimal use given a specific 8305 processor. The features are defined within the tune files and allow 8306 arguments (i.e. ``TUNE_*ARGS``) to be dynamically generated based on 8307 the features. 8308 8309 The OpenEmbedded build system verifies the features to be sure they 8310 are not conflicting and that they are supported. 8311 8312 The BitBake configuration file (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``) defines 8313 ``TUNE_FEATURES`` as follows: 8314 :: 8315 8316 TUNE_FEATURES ??= "${TUNE_FEATURES_tune-${DEFAULTTUNE}}" 8317 8318 See the :term:`DEFAULTTUNE` variable for more information. 8319 8320 :term:`TUNE_LDARGS` 8321 Specifies architecture-specific linker flags for the target system. 8322 The set of flags is based on the selected tune features. 8323 ``TUNE_LDARGS`` is set using the tune include files, which are 8324 typically under ``meta/conf/machine/include/`` and are influenced 8325 through :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`. For example, the 8326 ``meta/conf/machine/include/x86/arch-x86.inc`` file defines the flags 8327 for the x86 architecture as follows: 8328 :: 8329 8330 TUNE_LDARGS += "${@bb.utils.contains("TUNE_FEATURES", "mx32", "-m elf32_x86_64", "", d)}" 8331 8332 .. note:: 8333 8334 Board Support Packages (BSPs) select the tune. The selected tune, 8335 in turn, affects the tune variables themselves (i.e. the tune can 8336 supply its own set of flags). 8337 8338 :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH` 8339 The package architecture understood by the packaging system to define 8340 the architecture, ABI, and tuning of output packages. The specific 8341 tune is defined using the "_tune" override as follows: 8342 :: 8343 8344 TUNE_PKGARCH_tune-tune = "tune" 8345 8346 These tune-specific package architectures are defined in the machine 8347 include files. Here is an example of the "core2-32" tuning as used in 8348 the ``meta/conf/machine/include/tune-core2.inc`` file: 8349 :: 8350 8351 TUNE_PKGARCH_tune-core2-32 = "core2-32" 8352 8353 :term:`TUNEABI` 8354 An underlying Application Binary Interface (ABI) used by a particular 8355 tuning in a given toolchain layer. Providers that use prebuilt 8356 libraries can use the ``TUNEABI``, 8357 :term:`TUNEABI_OVERRIDE`, and 8358 :term:`TUNEABI_WHITELIST` variables to check 8359 compatibility of tunings against their selection of libraries. 8360 8361 If ``TUNEABI`` is undefined, then every tuning is allowed. See the 8362 :ref:`sanity <ref-classes-sanity>` class to see how the variable is 8363 used. 8364 8365 :term:`TUNEABI_OVERRIDE` 8366 If set, the OpenEmbedded system ignores the 8367 :term:`TUNEABI_WHITELIST` variable. 8368 Providers that use prebuilt libraries can use the 8369 ``TUNEABI_OVERRIDE``, ``TUNEABI_WHITELIST``, and 8370 :term:`TUNEABI` variables to check compatibility of a 8371 tuning against their selection of libraries. 8372 8373 See the :ref:`sanity <ref-classes-sanity>` class to see how the 8374 variable is used. 8375 8376 :term:`TUNEABI_WHITELIST` 8377 A whitelist of permissible :term:`TUNEABI` values. If 8378 ``TUNEABI_WHITELIST`` is not set, all tunes are allowed. Providers 8379 that use prebuilt libraries can use the ``TUNEABI_WHITELIST``, 8380 :term:`TUNEABI_OVERRIDE`, and ``TUNEABI`` 8381 variables to check compatibility of a tuning against their selection 8382 of libraries. 8383 8384 See the :ref:`sanity <ref-classes-sanity>` class to see how the 8385 variable is used. 8386 8387 :term:`TUNECONFLICTS[feature]` 8388 Specifies CPU or Application Binary Interface (ABI) tuning features 8389 that conflict with feature. 8390 8391 Known tuning conflicts are specified in the machine include files in 8392 the :term:`Source Directory`. Here is an example from 8393 the ``meta/conf/machine/include/mips/arch-mips.inc`` include file 8394 that lists the "o32" and "n64" features as conflicting with the "n32" 8395 feature: 8396 :: 8397 8398 TUNECONFLICTS[n32] = "o32 n64" 8399 8400 :term:`TUNEVALID[feature]` 8401 Specifies a valid CPU or Application Binary Interface (ABI) tuning 8402 feature. The specified feature is stored as a flag. Valid features 8403 are specified in the machine include files (e.g. 8404 ``meta/conf/machine/include/arm/arch-arm.inc``). Here is an example 8405 from that file: 8406 :: 8407 8408 TUNEVALID[bigendian] = "Enable big-endian mode." 8409 8410 See the machine include files in the :term:`Source Directory` 8411 for these features. 8412 8413 :term:`UBOOT_CONFIG` 8414 Configures the :term:`UBOOT_MACHINE` and can 8415 also define :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` for individual 8416 cases. 8417 8418 Following is an example from the ``meta-fsl-arm`` layer. :: 8419 8420 UBOOT_CONFIG ??= "sd" 8421 UBOOT_CONFIG[sd] = "mx6qsabreauto_config,sdcard" 8422 UBOOT_CONFIG[eimnor] = "mx6qsabreauto_eimnor_config" 8423 UBOOT_CONFIG[nand] = "mx6qsabreauto_nand_config,ubifs" 8424 UBOOT_CONFIG[spinor] = "mx6qsabreauto_spinor_config" 8425 8426 In this example, "sd" is selected as the configuration of the possible four for the 8427 ``UBOOT_MACHINE``. The "sd" configuration defines 8428 "mx6qsabreauto_config" as the value for ``UBOOT_MACHINE``, while the 8429 "sdcard" specifies the ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` to use for the U-Boot image. 8430 8431 For more information on how the ``UBOOT_CONFIG`` is handled, see the 8432 :ref:`uboot-config <ref-classes-uboot-config>` 8433 class. 8434 8435 :term:`UBOOT_DTB_LOADADDRESS` 8436 Specifies the load address for the dtb image used by U-Boot. During FIT 8437 image creation, the ``UBOOT_DTB_LOADADDRESS`` variable is used in 8438 :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify 8439 the load address to be used in 8440 creating the dtb sections of Image Tree Source for the FIT image. 8441 8442 :term:`UBOOT_DTBO_LOADADDRESS` 8443 Specifies the load address for the dtbo image used by U-Boot. During FIT 8444 image creation, the ``UBOOT_DTBO_LOADADDRESS`` variable is used in 8445 :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify the load address to be used in 8446 creating the dtbo sections of Image Tree Source for the FIT image. 8447 8448 :term:`UBOOT_ENTRYPOINT` 8449 Specifies the entry point for the U-Boot image. During U-Boot image 8450 creation, the ``UBOOT_ENTRYPOINT`` variable is passed as a 8451 command-line parameter to the ``uboot-mkimage`` utility. 8452 8453 :term:`UBOOT_LOADADDRESS` 8454 Specifies the load address for the U-Boot image. During U-Boot image 8455 creation, the ``UBOOT_LOADADDRESS`` variable is passed as a 8456 command-line parameter to the ``uboot-mkimage`` utility. 8457 8458 :term:`UBOOT_LOCALVERSION` 8459 Appends a string to the name of the local version of the U-Boot 8460 image. For example, assuming the version of the U-Boot image built 8461 was "2013.10", the full version string reported by U-Boot would be 8462 "2013.10-yocto" given the following statement: 8463 :: 8464 8465 UBOOT_LOCALVERSION = "-yocto" 8466 8467 :term:`UBOOT_MACHINE` 8468 Specifies the value passed on the ``make`` command line when building 8469 a U-Boot image. The value indicates the target platform 8470 configuration. You typically set this variable from the machine 8471 configuration file (i.e. ``conf/machine/machine_name.conf``). 8472 8473 Please see the "Selection of Processor Architecture and Board Type" 8474 section in the U-Boot README for valid values for this variable. 8475 8476 :term:`UBOOT_MAKE_TARGET` 8477 Specifies the target called in the ``Makefile``. The default target 8478 is "all". 8479 8480 :term:`UBOOT_MKIMAGE` 8481 Specifies the name of the mkimage command as used by the 8482 :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to assemble 8483 the FIT image. This can be used to substitute an alternative command, wrapper 8484 script or function if desired. The default is "uboot-mkimage". 8485 8486 :term:`UBOOT_MKIMAGE_DTCOPTS` 8487 Options for the device tree compiler passed to mkimage '-D' 8488 feature while creating FIT image in :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class. 8489 If ``UBOOT_MKIMAGE_DTCOPTS`` is not set then kernel-fitimage will not 8490 pass the ``-D`` option to mkimage. 8491 8492 :term:`UBOOT_MKIMAGE_SIGN` 8493 Specifies the name of the mkimage command as used by the 8494 :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to sign 8495 the FIT image after it has been assembled (if enabled). This can be used 8496 to substitute an alternative command, wrapper script or function if 8497 desired. The default is "${:term:`UBOOT_MKIMAGE`}". 8498 8499 :term:`UBOOT_MKIMAGE_SIGN_ARGS` 8500 Optionally specifies additional arguments for the 8501 :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to pass to the 8502 mkimage command when signing the FIT image. 8503 8504 :term:`UBOOT_RD_ENTRYPOINT` 8505 Specifies the entrypoint for the RAM disk image. 8506 During FIT image creation, the 8507 ``UBOOT_RD_ENTRYPOINT`` variable is used 8508 in :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify the 8509 entrypoint to be used in creating the Image Tree Source for 8510 the FIT image. 8511 8512 :term:`UBOOT_RD_LOADADDRESS` 8513 Specifies the load address for the RAM disk image. 8514 During FIT image creation, the 8515 ``UBOOT_RD_LOADADDRESS`` variable is used 8516 in :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify the 8517 load address to be used in creating the Image Tree Source for 8518 the FIT image. 8519 8520 :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_ENABLE` 8521 Enable signing of FIT image. The default value is "0". 8522 8523 :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR` 8524 Location of the directory containing the RSA key and 8525 certificate used for signing FIT image. 8526 8527 :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYNAME` 8528 The name of keys used for signing U-Boot FIT image stored in 8529 :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR` directory. For e.g. dev.key key and dev.crt 8530 certificate stored in :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR` directory will have 8531 :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYNAME` set to "dev". 8532 8533 :term:`UBOOT_SUFFIX` 8534 Points to the generated U-Boot extension. For example, ``u-boot.sb`` 8535 has a ``.sb`` extension. 8536 8537 The default U-Boot extension is ``.bin`` 8538 8539 :term:`UBOOT_TARGET` 8540 Specifies the target used for building U-Boot. The target is passed 8541 directly as part of the "make" command (e.g. SPL and AIS). If you do 8542 not specifically set this variable, the OpenEmbedded build process 8543 passes and uses "all" for the target during the U-Boot building 8544 process. 8545 8546 :term:`UNKNOWN_CONFIGURE_WHITELIST` 8547 Specifies a list of options that, if reported by the configure script 8548 as being invalid, should not generate a warning during the 8549 :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task. Normally, invalid 8550 configure options are simply not passed to the configure script (e.g. 8551 should be removed from :term:`EXTRA_OECONF` or 8552 :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`). 8553 However, common options, for example, exist that are passed to all 8554 configure scripts at a class level that might not be valid for some 8555 configure scripts. It follows that no benefit exists in seeing a 8556 warning about these options. For these cases, the options are added 8557 to ``UNKNOWN_CONFIGURE_WHITELIST``. 8558 8559 The configure arguments check that uses 8560 ``UNKNOWN_CONFIGURE_WHITELIST`` is part of the 8561 :ref:`insane <ref-classes-insane>` class and is only enabled if the 8562 recipe inherits the :ref:`autotools <ref-classes-autotools>` class. 8563 8564 :term:`UPDATERCPN` 8565 For recipes inheriting the 8566 :ref:`update-rc.d <ref-classes-update-rc.d>` class, ``UPDATERCPN`` 8567 specifies the package that contains the initscript that is enabled. 8568 8569 The default value is "${PN}". Given that almost all recipes that 8570 install initscripts package them in the main package for the recipe, 8571 you rarely need to set this variable in individual recipes. 8572 8573 :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_GITTAGREGEX` 8574 You can perform a per-recipe check for what the latest upstream 8575 source code version is by calling ``bitbake -c checkpkg`` recipe. If 8576 the recipe source code is provided from Git repositories, the 8577 OpenEmbedded build system determines the latest upstream version by 8578 picking the latest tag from the list of all repository tags. 8579 8580 You can use the ``UPSTREAM_CHECK_GITTAGREGEX`` variable to provide a 8581 regular expression to filter only the relevant tags should the 8582 default filter not work correctly. 8583 :: 8584 8585 UPSTREAM_CHECK_GITTAGREGEX = "git_tag_regex" 8586 8587 :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_REGEX` 8588 Use the ``UPSTREAM_CHECK_REGEX`` variable to specify a different 8589 regular expression instead of the default one when the package 8590 checking system is parsing the page found using 8591 :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI`. 8592 :: 8593 8594 UPSTREAM_CHECK_REGEX = "package_regex" 8595 8596 :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI` 8597 You can perform a per-recipe check for what the latest upstream 8598 source code version is by calling ``bitbake -c checkpkg`` recipe. If 8599 the source code is provided from tarballs, the latest version is 8600 determined by fetching the directory listing where the tarball is and 8601 attempting to find a later tarball. When this approach does not work, 8602 you can use ``UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI`` to provide a different URI that 8603 contains the link to the latest tarball. 8604 :: 8605 8606 UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI = "recipe_url" 8607 8608 :term:`USE_DEVFS` 8609 Determines if ``devtmpfs`` is used for ``/dev`` population. The 8610 default value used for ``USE_DEVFS`` is "1" when no value is 8611 specifically set. Typically, you would set ``USE_DEVFS`` to "0" for a 8612 statically populated ``/dev`` directory. 8613 8614 See the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:selecting a device manager`" section in 8615 the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for information on how to 8616 use this variable. 8617 8618 :term:`USE_VT` 8619 When using 8620 :ref:`SysVinit <dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling system services>`, 8621 determines whether or not to run a 8622 `getty <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_%28Unix%29>`__ on any 8623 virtual terminals in order to enable logging in through those 8624 terminals. 8625 8626 The default value used for ``USE_VT`` is "1" when no default value is 8627 specifically set. Typically, you would set ``USE_VT`` to "0" in the 8628 machine configuration file for machines that do not have a graphical 8629 display attached and therefore do not need virtual terminal 8630 functionality. 8631 8632 :term:`USER_CLASSES` 8633 A list of classes to globally inherit. These classes are used by the 8634 OpenEmbedded build system to enable extra features (e.g. 8635 ``buildstats``, ``image-mklibs``, and so forth). 8636 8637 The default list is set in your ``local.conf`` file: 8638 :: 8639 8640 USER_CLASSES ?= "buildstats image-mklibs image-prelink" 8641 8642 For more information, see 8643 ``meta-poky/conf/local.conf.sample`` in the :term:`Source Directory`. 8644 8645 :term:`USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC` 8646 If set to ``error``, forces the OpenEmbedded build system to produce 8647 an error if the user identification (``uid``) and group 8648 identification (``gid``) values are not defined in any of the files 8649 listed in :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES` and 8650 :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES`. If set to 8651 ``warn``, a warning will be issued instead. 8652 8653 The default behavior for the build system is to dynamically apply 8654 ``uid`` and ``gid`` values. Consequently, the 8655 ``USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC`` variable is by default not set. If you plan 8656 on using statically assigned ``gid`` and ``uid`` values, you should 8657 set the ``USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC`` variable in your ``local.conf`` 8658 file as follows: 8659 :: 8660 8661 USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC = "error" 8662 8663 Overriding the 8664 default behavior implies you are going to also take steps to set 8665 static ``uid`` and ``gid`` values through use of the 8666 :term:`USERADDEXTENSION`, 8667 :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES`, and 8668 :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES` variables. 8669 8670 .. note:: 8671 8672 There is a difference in behavior between setting 8673 ``USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC`` to ``error`` and setting it to ``warn``. 8674 When it is set to ``warn``, the build system will report a warning for 8675 every undefined ``uid`` and ``gid`` in any recipe. But when it is set 8676 to ``error``, it will only report errors for recipes that are actually 8677 built. 8678 This saves you from having to add static IDs for recipes that you 8679 know will never be built. 8680 8681 :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES` 8682 Specifies a password file to use for obtaining static group 8683 identification (``gid``) values when the OpenEmbedded build system 8684 adds a group to the system during package installation. 8685 8686 When applying static group identification (``gid``) values, the 8687 OpenEmbedded build system looks in :term:`BBPATH` for a 8688 ``files/group`` file and then applies those ``uid`` values. Set the 8689 variable as follows in your ``local.conf`` file: 8690 :: 8691 8692 8693 USERADD_GID_TABLES = "files/group" 8694 8695 .. note:: 8696 8697 Setting the :term:`USERADDEXTENSION` variable to "useradd-staticids" 8698 causes the build system to use static ``gid`` values. 8699 8700 :term:`USERADD_PACKAGES` 8701 When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class, 8702 this variable specifies the individual packages within the recipe 8703 that require users and/or groups to be added. 8704 8705 You must set this variable if the recipe inherits the class. For 8706 example, the following enables adding a user for the main package in 8707 a recipe: 8708 :: 8709 8710 USERADD_PACKAGES = "${PN}" 8711 8712 .. note:: 8713 8714 It follows that if you are going to use the ``USERADD_PACKAGES`` 8715 variable, you need to set one or more of the :term:`USERADD_PARAM`, 8716 :term:`GROUPADD_PARAM`, or :term:`GROUPMEMS_PARAM` variables. 8717 8718 :term:`USERADD_PARAM` 8719 When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class, 8720 this variable specifies for a package what parameters should pass to 8721 the ``useradd`` command if you add a user to the system when the 8722 package is installed. 8723 8724 Here is an example from the ``dbus`` recipe: 8725 :: 8726 8727 USERADD_PARAM_${PN} = "--system --home ${localstatedir}/lib/dbus \ 8728 --no-create-home --shell /bin/false \ 8729 --user-group messagebus" 8730 8731 For information on the 8732 standard Linux shell command ``useradd``, see 8733 https://linux.die.net/man/8/useradd. 8734 8735 :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES` 8736 Specifies a password file to use for obtaining static user 8737 identification (``uid``) values when the OpenEmbedded build system 8738 adds a user to the system during package installation. 8739 8740 When applying static user identification (``uid``) values, the 8741 OpenEmbedded build system looks in :term:`BBPATH` for a 8742 ``files/passwd`` file and then applies those ``uid`` values. Set the 8743 variable as follows in your ``local.conf`` file: 8744 :: 8745 8746 USERADD_UID_TABLES = "files/passwd" 8747 8748 .. note:: 8749 8750 Setting the :term:`USERADDEXTENSION` variable to "useradd-staticids" 8751 causes the build system to use static ``uid`` values. 8752 8753 :term:`USERADDEXTENSION` 8754 When set to "useradd-staticids", causes the OpenEmbedded build system 8755 to base all user and group additions on a static ``passwd`` and 8756 ``group`` files found in :term:`BBPATH`. 8757 8758 To use static user identification (``uid``) and group identification 8759 (``gid``) values, set the variable as follows in your ``local.conf`` 8760 file: USERADDEXTENSION = "useradd-staticids" 8761 8762 .. note:: 8763 8764 Setting this variable to use static ``uid`` and ``gid`` 8765 values causes the OpenEmbedded build system to employ the 8766 :ref:`ref-classes-useradd` class. 8767 8768 If you use static ``uid`` and ``gid`` information, you must also 8769 specify the ``files/passwd`` and ``files/group`` files by setting the 8770 :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES` and 8771 :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES` variables. 8772 Additionally, you should also set the 8773 :term:`USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC` variable. 8774 8775 :term:`VOLATILE_LOG_DIR` 8776 Specifies the persistence of the target's ``/var/log`` directory, 8777 which is used to house postinstall target log files. 8778 8779 By default, ``VOLATILE_LOG_DIR`` is set to "yes", which means the 8780 file is not persistent. You can override this setting by setting the 8781 variable to "no" to make the log directory persistent. 8782 8783 :term:`WARN_QA` 8784 Specifies the quality assurance checks whose failures are reported as 8785 warnings by the OpenEmbedded build system. You set this variable in 8786 your distribution configuration file. For a list of the checks you 8787 can control with this variable, see the 8788 ":ref:`insane.bbclass <ref-classes-insane>`" section. 8789 8790 :term:`WKS_FILE` 8791 Specifies the location of the Wic kickstart file that is used by the 8792 OpenEmbedded build system to create a partitioned image 8793 (image\ ``.wic``). For information on how to create a partitioned 8794 image, see the 8795 ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating partitioned images using wic`" 8796 section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. For details on 8797 the kickstart file format, see the ":doc:`/ref-manual/kickstart`" Chapter. 8798 8799 :term:`WKS_FILE_DEPENDS` 8800 When placed in the recipe that builds your image, this variable lists 8801 build-time dependencies. The ``WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable is only 8802 applicable when Wic images are active (i.e. when 8803 :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` contains entries related 8804 to Wic). If your recipe does not create Wic images, the variable has 8805 no effect. 8806 8807 The ``WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable is similar to the 8808 :term:`DEPENDS` variable. When you use the variable in 8809 your recipe that builds the Wic image, dependencies you list in the 8810 ``WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable are added to the ``DEPENDS`` variable. 8811 8812 With the ``WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable, you have the possibility to 8813 specify a list of additional dependencies (e.g. native tools, 8814 bootloaders, and so forth), that are required to build Wic images. 8815 Following is an example: 8816 :: 8817 8818 WKS_FILE_DEPENDS = "some-native-tool" 8819 8820 In the 8821 previous example, some-native-tool would be replaced with an actual 8822 native tool on which the build would depend. 8823 8824 :term:`WORKDIR` 8825 The pathname of the work directory in which the OpenEmbedded build 8826 system builds a recipe. This directory is located within the 8827 :term:`TMPDIR` directory structure and is specific to 8828 the recipe being built and the system for which it is being built. 8829 8830 The ``WORKDIR`` directory is defined as follows: 8831 :: 8832 8833 ${TMPDIR}/work/${MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS}/${PN}/${EXTENDPE}${PV}-${PR} 8834 8835 The actual directory depends on several things: 8836 8837 - :term:`TMPDIR`: The top-level build output directory 8838 - :term:`MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS`: The target system identifier 8839 - :term:`PN`: The recipe name 8840 - :term:`EXTENDPE`: The epoch - (if :term:`PE` is not specified, which 8841 is usually the case for most recipes, then `EXTENDPE` is blank) 8842 - :term:`PV`: The recipe version 8843 - :term:`PR`: The recipe revision 8844 8845 As an example, assume a Source Directory top-level folder name 8846 ``poky``, a default Build Directory at ``poky/build``, and a 8847 ``qemux86-poky-linux`` machine target system. Furthermore, suppose 8848 your recipe is named ``foo_1.3.0-r0.bb``. In this case, the work 8849 directory the build system uses to build the package would be as 8850 follows: 8851 :: 8852 8853 poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/foo/1.3.0-r0 8854 8855 :term:`XSERVER` 8856 Specifies the packages that should be installed to provide an X 8857 server and drivers for the current machine, assuming your image 8858 directly includes ``packagegroup-core-x11-xserver`` or, perhaps 8859 indirectly, includes "x11-base" in 8860 :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`. 8861 8862 The default value of ``XSERVER``, if not specified in the machine 8863 configuration, is "xserver-xorg xf86-video-fbdev xf86-input-evdev". 8864 8865